JP2018033648A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving a performance effect during music selection.SOLUTION: A game machine for performing a game such as a pachinko game machine comprises music reproduction means (for example, a performance control CPU for executing a step S634) capable of reproducing a music in a specific period (for example, a period in a jackpot game state). The game machine can select a music which is reproduced in the specific period from plural kinds of musics. Since the music reproduction means reproduces a part of the selected music and a specific part of the music different from a beginning part of the music (for example, a bridge part) during music selection (for example, executing a step S628), a performance effect during music selection is improved.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 17

Description

  The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

  Some gaming machines can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that can select a music piece according to the player's action and can output the selected music piece in an advantageous state and a state other than the advantageous state.

JP 2014-233406 A

  The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a poor effect when selecting a song.

  This invention is made | formed in view of the said situation, and it aims at providing the game machine which can improve the production effect at the time of music selection.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous for a player,
Period display means for displaying a period display (timer display in the second area 9092 in FIG. 55) (production control microcomputer 90100, effect display device 909 in FIG. 55, second area 9092, and timer display in step S90802 in FIG. 53) Processing)
Predetermined effect execution means (effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (super reach effect, etc.) when the period display is in a predetermined mode (such as when the timer display is 0 seconds in the second area 9092 of FIG. 55). Microcomputer 90100, processing for executing super reach production in S90802 of FIG. 53),
In the display area for the period display (second display area 92 in FIG. 55), a specific display means (for effect control) capable of displaying a specific display other than the period display (specific display such as “?” Shown in FIG. 59). 55, such as the microcomputer 90100, the process of executing the specific display in S90802 of FIG.
Music reproduction means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes step S634 in FIG. 17) capable of reproducing music in a specific period (for example, a period in a big hit gaming state),
The music reproduced in the specific period can be selected from a plurality of types of music (for example, music A to F shown in FIG. 18C),
The music playback means plays back a specific part that is a part of the currently selected music and is different from the head of the music at the time of music selection (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S628 of FIG. 17). Such).
According to such a structure, the production effect at the time of music selection can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
At the time of music selection, an image corresponding to the music reproduced in the specific period, and displaying the image corresponding to the specific part (for example, the music corresponding image in the display area VA1 shown in FIG. 19B) May be provided.
According to such a structure, the production effect at the time of music selection can be improved.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
Storage means for storing one piece of music as a plurality of divided audio data including specific part data indicating the sound of the specific part (for example, a plurality of voices including chorus data as shown in FIG. 19A) ROM 121 for storing data)
The music reproduction means reproduces the specific part of one music based on the specific part data when the music is selected (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S628 of FIG. 17). During the specific period, the music data divided into a plurality of pieces may be connected to reproduce one piece of music (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S634 in FIG. 17).
According to such a configuration, the burden of data capacity can be reduced.

(4) Any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3)
A gaming machine capable of effect adjustment (for example, volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, mode switching, etc.) relating to a game in accordance with a player's operation (for example, operation of the stick controller 31A, player's predetermined operation, etc.)
When adjusting the effect, the adjustment status of the effect adjustment (for example, volume adjustment status, brightness adjustment status, mode switching status, etc.) can be displayed.
In the first state (for example, in a pachinko game machine, a game state other than the super reach effect, or in a state of waiting for a customer and not displaying an error, in the slot machine, a game state other than a continuous effect or a customer In the waiting state and the like, such as a state where no error is being displayed), the adjustment status is displayed so as to be visible regardless of the player's action (for example, the volume adjustment status is displayed in accordance with the execution of processing such as step S162 by the effect control CPU 120) Displayed on the display device 5),
A game that is different from the first state and executes a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect for a pachinko machine, a continuous effect for a slot machine, etc.) (for example, a game in a super reach effect for a pachinko machine) In a state, a gaming state during a continuous production in a slot machine, or the like, the adjustment status is difficult to view or cannot be visually recognized (for example, the volume adjustment status is displayed on the image display device 5 according to the execution of processing such as step S614 by the performance control CPU 120) The adjustment status can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the player's action (for example, based on the operation of the stick controller 31A, etc., according to the execution of processing such as step S348 by the effect control CPU 120). The volume adjustment status is not displayed on the image display device 5 for a predetermined period. ) It may be.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the adjustment status of the effect adjustment according to the player's request while suppressing the decrease in the effect of the specific effect, and to improve the game entertainment.

(5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4),
Notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect (for example, a prize ball number notification effect, an obtained number notification effect, a cumulative prize ball number notification effect, a cumulative winning number notification effect, a probability change confirmation notification effect, a continuous change count notification, a jackpot song name notification) , Right-handed notification, error notification, effect control CPU 120 for executing promotion effect during jackpot, etc.)
The notification effect executing means, as the notification effect, a first notification effect for notifying the magnitude of the value acquired in the specific period (for example, the number of prize balls for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a winning ball during a big hit) Notification effect, etc.) and a second notification effect for notifying the magnitude of the value acquired during the special period (for example, a prize ball number notification effect for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during a big hit in consecutive chans) ) And can be executed
The first notification effect and the second notification effect have different priorities (for example, when the prize ball number notification effect is being executed in the process of step S397 in the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 31). In other words, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect may not be executed).
According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the following means (A1)-(A9). Conventionally, in gaming machines, a period display such as a timer display as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-61767 has been performed, and when the period display is in a predetermined mode (0 seconds), A gaming machine that performs a production is known. However, in such a gaming machine, no effect is taken into consideration for the process before the period display is executed, and it is not interesting. In view of this point, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game in the process before the period display is executed.

(A1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect,
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 901) that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Period display means for displaying a period display (timer display in the second area 9092 in FIG. 55) (production control microcomputer 90100, effect display device 909 in FIG. 55, second area 9092, and timer display in step S90802 in FIG. 53) Processing)
Predetermined effect execution means (effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (super reach effect, etc.) when the period display is in a predetermined mode (such as when the timer display is 0 seconds in the second area 9092 of FIG. 55). Microcomputer 90100, processing for executing super reach production in S90802 of FIG. 53),
In the display area for the period display (second display area 92 in FIG. 55), a specific display means (for effect control) capable of displaying a specific display other than the period display (specific display such as “?” Shown in FIG. 59). 55, an effect display device 909 of FIG. 55, and a process of executing specific display in S90802 of FIG.
According to such a configuration, it can be noted whether the period display is displayed or the specific display is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the process before the period display is executed.

(A2) The gaming machine of (A1),
As a display pattern in the display area, a period display pattern (FIG. 59) for displaying the period display after executing a specific effect (such as an effect of rotating display information in the second area 9092 as shown in FIG. 55E). And a specific display pattern (shown in FIG. 59) for displaying the specific display after executing the specific effect. For example, a display pattern of a specific display for performing a specific display such as “?” Display).
According to such a configuration, it can be noted whether the period display is displayed or the specific display is displayed, and the interest of the game can be further improved with respect to the process before the period display is executed.

(A3) The gaming machine of (A2),
The period display pattern and the specific display pattern can be executed at a plurality of timings during the variable display (as shown in FIG. 57, the second region effect is executed at a plurality of timings such as at the start of the change or before the start of reach. Etc.), and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the execution timing (as shown in FIG. 57, the selection ratio of the execution timing of the second area effect is different at the time of loss and the big hit, etc.) You may do it.
According to such a configuration, it can be noted at which timing the period display pattern and the specific display pattern are executed.

(A4) The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A3),
The specific display is an expectation suggestion display (an indication of “No way? (Expected) low)”, “Intense fever (expected))” or the like in FIG. It may be included (FIG. 59).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus on whether the period display or the specific display is displayed, and when the specific display is displayed, it is possible to focus on the display mode of the specific display.

(A5) The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A4),
A re-variable display means (for effect control) capable of executing re-variable display (pseudo-continuous, etc.) for temporarily resuming the variable display after the variable display is temporarily stopped from when the variable display is started until the display result is derived and displayed. A microcomputer 90100).
The specific display may include a re-variation suggesting display that suggests that the re-variable display is executed (such as “NEXT (pseudo-link suggestion)” display in FIG. 59).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay more attention to whether the period display or the specific display is displayed, and when the specific display is displayed, the display mode of the specific display is further focused. Can be made.

(A6) The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A5),
Reach production execution means (production control microcomputer 90100, etc.) capable of executing any one of a plurality of types of reach production is further provided,
The specific display may include a reach suggestion display that suggests a type of the reach effect (such as “display of battle (battle reach suggestion)” shown in FIG. 59).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay more attention to whether the period display or the specific display is displayed, and when the specific display is displayed, the display mode of the specific display is further focused. Can be made.

(A7) The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A6),
The period display means is a period from when the period display is started until the period display becomes the predetermined mode (such as 0 seconds).
After the period display is updated, the first pattern (FIG. 61) having the predetermined mode without passing through the stop mode (such as the freeze effect shown in FIGS. 61B and 61C) for stopping the update of the period display. (F) to (i) patterns, etc.)
After the period display is updated, the second pattern (FIG. 61) is used as the predetermined mode after passing through the stop mode (freeze effect shown in FIGS. 61B and 61C) for stopping the update of the period display. (A) to (e), etc.) may be executed.
According to such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode of the period display in the period from when the period display is started until the period display becomes the predetermined mode.

(A8) The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A7),
The predetermined effect execution means performs a special pattern (as shown in FIG. 62, in the second area 9092) that executes again the update of the period display by the period display means when the period display becomes the predetermined mode. It is also possible to execute a special pattern or the like in which the time display value of the timer display 9094 increases when the timer display reaches 0 seconds.
According to such a structure, a player can be made to pay attention to the effect when a period display becomes a predetermined mode.

(A9) The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A8),
The predetermined effect execution means can change the display mode of the period display depending on whether or not a special effect is being executed in a period from when the period display is started until the period display becomes the predetermined mode. (As shown in FIG. 63, the position of the third area 9096 can be changed depending on whether or not the SP reach is executed).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by taking into consideration the situation of the effects performed during the period from when the period display is started until the period display becomes a predetermined mode.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of a loss. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of various commands. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a volume condition display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot music determination process. It is a figure which shows an example of the music which can be reproduced | regenerated during a big hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of the data which can be reproduced | regenerated during a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a change effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a temporary display process. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of no volume change operation in a super reach fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of volume change operation in a super reach effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an execution timing of the volume condition display in a super reach fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the example of an execution timing of a volume condition display when there is volume change operation just before the start of super reach production, or just before completion. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect process at the time of attacker opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a probability change confirmation alerting | reporting effect operation control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball number notification effect operation control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous change frequency alerting | reporting operation control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot music name alerting | reporting operation control process. It is a figure which shows an example of various alerting | reporting images. It is a figure which shows an example of a Z value setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting | reporting image when the execution period of a prize ball number alerting | reporting effect, a cumulative prize ball number alerting | reporting effect, continuous number of times notification, and jackpot music name alerting | reporting overlaps. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting | reporting image when the execution period of a probable change confirmation alerting | reporting effect, a prize ball number alerting | reporting effect, a continuous number of times alerting | reporting, and a jackpot music name alerting | reporting overlaps. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting | reporting image when the execution period of error alerting | reporting, prize ball number alerting | reporting effect, continuous number of times alerting | reporting, and jackpot music name alerting | reporting overlaps. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting | reporting image when the execution period of error alerting | reporting, a probable change confirmation alerting | reporting effect, continuous number of times alerting | reporting, and the jackpot music name alerting | reporting overlaps. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure which shows a hit classification table. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a main board | substrate (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table used in order to determine a fluctuation pattern in a table format. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the pending | holding storage buffer in the microcomputer for game control. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a figure for demonstrating area | region production. It is a figure which shows an area | region production execution determination table. It is a figure which shows an area | region production execution timing determination table. It is a figure which shows a 1st area | region production determination table. It is a figure which shows a 2nd area | region production determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect in the 2nd other form example. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect in the 3rd other form example. It is a figure for demonstrating the various effects in the 4th other form example.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each have a number indicating "0" to "9", a symbol indicating "-", or a lighting pattern of each segment not limited to a number or symbol. Various types of special symbols composed of etc. are variably displayed. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  A plurality of types of special symbols that are variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B only need to have a symbol number for identifying each of them. As an example, “0” is added as a symbol number to a special symbol indicating a symbol “−”, and “1” to “9” may be added as symbol numbers for a plurality of types of lighting patterns. .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, in response to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. And in response to the start of one of the changes in the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol can be changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas in the image display device 5. The confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the display result is stopped and displayed.

  In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special graphic using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronism with the figure game, variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified is performed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a first hold display unit 5HR, a second hold display unit 5HL, and an active display unit AHA are arranged. The 1st reservation display part 5HR displays the 1st special figure reservation memory number so that identification is possible. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of variable display hold corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The 2nd reservation display part 5HL displays the 2nd special figure reservation memory number so that specification is possible. The second special figure holding memory number is the variable display holding number corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is such that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It occurs based on the start winning by doing. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  For example, a special game start condition (first start condition) using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A due to the occurrence of the first start prize that the game ball passes (enters) through the first start prize opening. ) Is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first special figure holding storage number is 1. Addition (increment) is made, and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when the second start winning that the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening is generated, the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B (second start condition) ) Is established, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not established, the second special figure holding memory number is 1. Addition (increment) is made, and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented). If the first special figure reservation storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”) when the first start winning is generated, the first start condition is not satisfied, and the first start winning is based on the start winning. The special figure game may be invalid and only the payout of the prize ball may be performed. Further, if the second special figure holding storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) when the second start winning is generated, the second start condition is not satisfied, and based on the start winning. The special figure game may be invalid and only the payout of the prize ball may be performed.

  In the first hold display section 5HR, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the first special figure is performed. In the second hold display section 5HL, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the second special figure is performed. The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  The first hold display unit 5HR may be configured to perform the first hold display, for example, left-justified. The first hold display section 5HR is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit value “4” of the first special figure hold memory number, and the hold numbers “1”, “2”, “3” in order from the left end. ”And“ 4 ”. When the number of holds of the special figure game using the first special figure increases due to the establishment of the first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first hold display part 5HR, the hold on the first hold display part 5HR At the leftmost display portion corresponding to the number “1”, a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold memory number. If there is another first hold display in the first hold display portion 5HR, a new first hold display is hidden on the right side of the display part where the other first hold display is performed. It is added to the part (corresponding to any of the holding numbers “2” to “4”). When there is a plurality of first hold displays in the first hold display section 5HR, when a special game using the first special figure is started due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first hold display section 5HR While deleting (digesting) the first hold display in the leftmost display part corresponding to the hold number “1”, each of the first hold display in the display part corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” Move (shift) in the direction (left side) of the erased display area.

  The second hold display unit 5HL only needs to be configured so that the second hold display is performed, for example, right-justified. The second reserved storage unit 5HL is provided with four display parts corresponding to “4” which is the upper limit value of the second special figure reserved storage number, and the reserved numbers “1”, “2”, “3” in order from the right end. ”And“ 4 ”. When the number of holds of the special figure game using the second special figure increases due to the establishment of the second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second hold display part 5HL, the second hold display part 5HL holds it. At the rightmost display part corresponding to the number “1”, a new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented second special figure hold memory number. If there is another second hold display in the second hold display section 5HL, a new second hold display is hidden on the left side of the display part where the other second hold display is performed. It is added to the part (corresponding to any of the holding numbers “2” to “4”). When there is a plurality of second hold indications in the second hold display portion 5HL, and when the special figure game using the second special view is started due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second hold display portion 5HL While deleting (digesting) the second hold display in the rightmost display portion corresponding to the hold number “1”, each of the second hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” Move (shift) in the direction (right side) of the erased display area.

  The active display unit AHA displays the same effect image as the hold display or a different effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. The display in the active display portion AHA is referred to as active display (corresponding display corresponding to variable display). In the active display portion AHA, for example, the first erased (digested) first in the first hold display portion 5HR in response to the start of the special figure game using the first special figure when the first start condition is satisfied. An active display corresponding to the hold display is performed. Further, in the active display part AHA, for example, in response to the start of the special figure game using the second special figure when the second start condition is established, the active display part AHA is erased (digested) in the second holding storage part 5HL. An active display corresponding to the second hold display is performed. The first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display only need to have colors and patterns in common. For example, the active display is displayed larger than the first hold display and the second hold display. There may be.

  In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 1, an active display portion AHA is arranged between the first hold display portion 5HR and the second hold display portion 5HL. On the other hand, the active display unit AHA is not limited to the one arranged between the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL, and is arranged at an arbitrary position in the display area of the image display device 5. It only has to be. Further, the arrangement of the first hold display section 5HR and the second hold display section 5HL can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the first hold display section 5HR and the second hold display section 5HL may be replaced with each other.

  A display for displaying the number of reserved special figure memories may be provided together with the first hold display section 5HR and the second hold display section 5HL, or instead of the first hold display section 5HR and the second hold display section 5HL. . In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL, the number of special figure hold memories can be specified at the top of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B for displaying are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED).

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. (Ordinary electric accessory) is provided and a second start winning opening is formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening. Do not close. On the other hand, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning hole. ) Make it open. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter (pass) through the second start winning opening, while the expansion when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. You may comprise so that a game ball may enter (pass) more easily than an open state. As described above, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has the first variable state such as the open state or the expanded open state in which the game ball can pass (enter) through the second start winning port, and the game ball cannot pass (enter). It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state such as a closed state or a normally open state that is difficult to pass (enter).

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game media), and the first reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value. If it is less than (for example, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, The second start condition is satisfied.

  The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big winning prize opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning prize opening. become unable. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ). In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize winning opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball into the special prize winning port. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is referred to as a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. A controller sensor unit 35A including a tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilt operation (operation) with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the lower pan body or the like below the stick controller 31A.

  The member that forms the upper plate is, for example, a push that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation (operation) by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). A button 31B is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back of the game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize door.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 performs all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or one of the on / off operations in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation, such as a section.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, the game effect lamp 9, LED for decoration, etc. A lamp driver circuit that performs on / off driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22 </ b> A and second start port switch 22 </ b> B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted to the main board 11. Wiring is connected. In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball | bowl as game media like what is called a sensor, for example. Further, the main board 11 is connected with wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control, such as the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. Each of these effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1” and the first bit of the EXT data may be set to “0” in advance.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  Note that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 only needs to incorporate the RAM 102 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 104 or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be. For example, the random counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 102 indicates a predetermined random number value. The random number value may be updated by storing numerical data and the CPU 103 updating the stored value regularly or irregularly.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data and table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. Table data to be stored is stored. In the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are temporarily stored so as to be rewritable.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. 5, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in FIG. 5, a random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 35B an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the user's operation action has been detected is also connected.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, a random counter for effects provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation in an updatable manner. . The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. As an example, on the side of the effect control board 12, numerical data indicating random values for determining various effects, such as a random number value for determining a stop symbol in a variable display of decorative symbols and a random value for determining a notice effect, can be counted. Controlled.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination tables, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is, for example, from process data including effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, an end code, and the like. It is configured.

  Various data used for controlling the rendering operation is stored in the RAM 122 mounted on the rendering control board 12 shown in FIG. Specifically, the RAM 122 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit. In the effect control flag setting unit, for example, a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. The flag is provided. For example, the production control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 performs control for executing decorative display variable display and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like. The VDP may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configuration may be used.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. It is comprised including. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 (Lighting signal) etc. are output.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hitting ball is emitted based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) performed by a player on a hitting operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A game ball as a game medium is launched toward a game area by a launch motor provided in the apparatus. When the game ball flowing down the game area passes (enters) the first start winning opening (first start area) formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the game ball is moved by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The first start condition is satisfied due to the detection. Thereafter, a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done.

  Further, when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening (second start area) formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Therefore, the second start condition is established. Thereafter, a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done. However, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second start winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Thereafter, the normal symbol game 20 is started by the normal symbol display 20 based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display such as the end of the previous normal symbol game has been completed. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per standard”, the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. When a predetermined time elapses, closing control or normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

  When a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started or when a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, a special game is started. It is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 12.

  After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, decorations of “left”, “middle”, and “right” arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a variable display of a decorative symbol (effect symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are also referred to as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, respectively. In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, a fixed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the image display device 5.

  When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) becomes “big jackpot” (specific display result), and the specific gaming state is advantageous for the player. It is controlled to the big hit gaming state. That is, whether or not the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. When the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, and the loss symbol is derived and displayed, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) is “lost” (non-specific display result).

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is “big hit”, it is determined in advance in the display area of the image display device 5. The finalized decorative symbol that is the winning combination is derived and displayed. As an example, a combination of big hits is determined by stopping and displaying the same decorative symbols all together on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is only necessary that the decorative design is derived and displayed.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in a first state advantageous to the player. Then, a period until a predetermined opening upper limit time (for example, 29.5 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses, or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls enter the big winning opening and a winning ball is generated. In the period up to, a round game (also simply referred to as “round”) is performed in which the big prize opening is continuously opened. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “2” or “15”) is reached.

  When the variable display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” may be included. When the jackpot type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, as a round game in the big hit gaming state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a first state (a big winning opening is in an open state) advantageous to the player. A normal open round in which the upper limit time to be performed is a relatively long time (for example, 29.5 seconds) is executed. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “surprise”, the upper limit time for the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to be in the first state (the big winning opening is open) as a round game in the big hit gaming state is relatively short. A short-term open round is executed, which is time (for example, 0.1 seconds). The big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as a first specific gaming state. The jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is also referred to as a second specific gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state when the big hit type is “surprise”, the upper limit time for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player in the short-term open round (the big winning opening is set by the big winning door). The upper limit of the period for setting the open state) is a second period (for example, 0.1 second) shorter than the first period in the normal open round. It should be noted that the same control as when the normal opening round is executed may be performed except that the opening period of the big prize opening is controlled to be the second period in the short-term opening round. Alternatively, when a short-term open round is executed, the number of round games executed is a second round number (for example, “2”) that is smaller than the first round number (for example, “15”) that is the number of executions of the normal open round. ). That is, the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is in the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) through the big winning opening in each round game as compared to the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is performed. The period to be changed becomes at least one of the second period shorter than the first period and the second round number of round games executed less than the first round number. That's fine.

  When such a short-term opening round is executed, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a prize winning opening. However, due to the opening period of the big winning opening being the second period (for example, 0.1 second), it becomes a big hit gaming state in which practically no balls (prize balls) can be obtained. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state (second specific gaming state) based on the fact that the jackpot type is “surprise” is the jackpot gaming state (first specified game state) based on the fact that the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”. The gaming state is more disadvantageous for the player than the gaming state. Thus, when the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed based on the fact that the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the game ball is likely to pass through the big winning opening. In the change mode, control is performed to change the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 between the first state (open state) and the second state (closed state). On the other hand, when the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed based on the fact that the jackpot type is “surprising”, the special change is made in the second change mode in which the gaming ball is difficult to pass through the big winning opening. Control is performed to change the variable winning ball apparatus 7 between the first state (open state) and the second state (closed state).

  The first state (open state) and the second state (closed state) of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 described above are the “first state” and “second state” that will be described in the description of the volume state display process (S162) described later. It is different from “state”. The “first state” to be described later is, for example, a gaming state other than during the super reach effect, or a state in which an error is not displayed, such as a waiting state for customers, and the “second state” to be described later is, for example, pachinko. In a gaming machine, it is a gaming state during super reach production.

  After the big hit gaming state is finished, the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” (hit probability) is controlled to be a positive change state that is higher than the normal state based on the fact that the predetermined probability change control condition is satisfied. There is. In the probability change state, a predetermined probability change end condition is satisfied, for example, a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times) or a big hit gaming state is started before the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until The probability variation end condition may be satisfied when the next big hit gaming state is started regardless of the number of executions of variable display. After the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to the short state when it becomes shorter than the normal state. In the short-time state, a predetermined short-time end condition is satisfied, for example, the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or the big hit gaming state is started before the variable display execution number reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state becomes a short-time state. On the other hand, after the big hit gaming state is ended when the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise probability”, the gaming state becomes the probability change state.

  In the probable change state and the short time state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second start winning opening than in the normal state. And a second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol change time (normal diagram change time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, or the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is “general”. Tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the probability of “per figure” is higher than that in the normal state, and the variable display result is “per figure”. By making the control longer than that in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts more than in the normal state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. In this way, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as “high base control”). By controlling to such a probable change state and a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is obtained. Even when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the high opening control may not be performed.

  In the image display device 5, the decorative symbol other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) is stopped in a state in which it matches the jackpot combination continuously for a predetermined time, A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to rocking, scaling, or deformation, or when multiple decorative symbols fluctuate synchronously with the same symbol, or the display position changes. An effect performed in a state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. As a reach effect, a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a display mode of the background image is changed, and a moving image different from the decorative design An effect operation different from changing the variation pattern of the decorative design, such as reproducing and displaying an image, may be executed. Not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are different from the previous operation mode that becomes the reach mode. The operation mode may be included in the reach effect. The reach state and its state are referred to as reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is not a big hit combination, it becomes “lost”, and the variability display state ends.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as reach patterns) having different operation modes (effect modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as reliability or big hit reliability) varies depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, a normal reach production (normal reach) and a super reach production (super reach) are preset. When the reach effect in the super reach is executed, there is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (expected degree of the big hit) than in the case where the reach effect in the normal reach is executed. In addition, the reach production that becomes the super reach may include a plurality of types of reach production including a super reach that executes a specific reach production in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is higher than other super reach.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach production, the variable display status of decorative designs may become reach status, and the variable display result may be a `` big hit '', etc. There may be a case where a variable display effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a variable display mode of decorative symbols. As an example, it is only necessary that a variable display effect of pseudo continuous variation (hereinafter also referred to as “pseudo continuous”) can be performed during variable display of a decorative design. It is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, a finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes a variable display result after the variable symbol display is started in response to the start condition of the special symbol game being satisfied once. After the temporary stop until the derivation is displayed, it is possible to perform the effect display for changing (pseudo-continuous change) again up to a predetermined time (for example, up to 3 times). The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the initial variation from the start of variable symbol display until the first temporary stop for all decorative symbols. What is necessary is just the number of times that the decorative symbol is re-variable in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, as an example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a plurality of pre-set pseudo-respective chances for special combinations are displayed. A decorative symbol that is one of the various types of lost combinations is displayed temporarily. In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, a predetermined effect such as an image display as a re-variation effect may be executed in accordance with a plurality of variable displays including the initial change. Note that the re-variation effect is not limited to that by displaying an image on the screen of the image display device 5, and may include any effect operation using various effect devices.

  As an example of a re-variation effect different from the image display, a plurality of decoration LEDs provided inside or outside the game area during each variation display (including the initial variation) by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect Controls may be made so that the number of which is lit is increased one by one. Further, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation), the display color of the decoration LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting LED among the plurality of decoration LEDs changes. May be controlled.

  As a further example of the re-change effect different from the image display, an effect model provided inside or outside the game area during each change display (including the initial change) by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect (including the initial change) The movable member may be controlled to operate. At this time, during the period of each variation display (including the initial variation), the operation mode of the production model (movable member) may be controlled to change, or among the plurality of production models (movable member). It may be controlled so that what is operated in changes.

  Control may be performed so that a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 during the period of each variable display (including the initial change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. . Further, as a re-variation effect, for example, when a decorative symbol that becomes a pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily stopped and displayed, a sound that becomes a special sound effect may be controlled to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition to some or all of these re-variation effects, or instead of some or all of these re-variation effects, lighting and blinking of decorative LEDs, operation of effect models, display of effect images, sound effects Control may be performed so as to execute a re-variation effect in which some or all of the outputs are combined. At this time, a case where a re-variation effect combining a plurality of types of effect forms is included, or a case where a re-change effect is performed multiple times, compared to a case where a re-change effect is executed with only one type of effect form. A game that is advantageous to a player or a possibility that a predetermined game value is given, such as the possibility that the variable display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the big hit game state (expected degree of big hit) when the production mode changes in The possibility of being controlled to the state may be increased.

  For example, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed once to three times, so that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once, and the decorative design It is possible to make it appear as if the variable display has been started 2-4 times in succession. When the number of repeated executions (pseudo-continuous times) of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) increases, there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (expected degree of big hit) than when the number of pseudo-continuous times is small. Get higher. Further, the production ratio may be controlled so as to change depending on the number of repeated executions of the pseudo continuous variation (number of pseudo continuous runs). For example, “reach determination” may be performed when the pseudo continuous variation is performed twice, and “super reach determination” may be performed when the pseudo continuous variation is performed three times. Note that the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be executed more than one to three times, for example, four or five times.

  In addition to “pseudo ream”, variable display effects using such variable display operation of decorative symbols include, for example, “slip”, “expansion chance eyes”, “end development opportunity eyes”, “slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “sliding”, “variable” of “left”, “middle”, “right” from the start of variable display of the decorative symbol to the display of the definite decorative symbol that is the variable display result is displayed. After changing the decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a single or a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” decorative symbol display area 5L) of the temporarily stopped display of decorative symbols are displayed. And / or the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R), the decorative symbol is changed again, and then the stop symbol is displayed. Thus, an effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped is performed.

  In the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, the decoration of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern that results in the variable display. In all of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is set as the reach state. Reach production begins. On the other hand, in the variable display effect of “end of development opportunity”, after the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols of the lost combinations (special combinations) that are the pseudo-continuous chances in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, Unlike the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect that changes the decorative symbols again in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols change again in some of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing so, an effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  During variable display of decorative patterns, unlike variable display effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-continuous”, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, a message image or voice output is displayed. There is a possibility that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state due to an effect operation different from the symbol variable display operation, that a reach effect by super reach may be executed, and the variable display result is `` A notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility of being a “hit”.

  The effect operation as the notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative symbols after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is only necessary to be executed (started) prior to the reach mode (before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a “hit” may include one that is executed after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode. In this way, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols until the fixed special symbols and fixed decorative symbols that result in variable display are derived. Anything that can give notice of sex is acceptable. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the contents of the effect operation (effect mode) when such a notice effect is executed.

  The notice effect includes a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as a pre-read effect). The pre-reading notice effect indicates that the variable display result is “big hit” according to the production mode before the variable display that is subject to notice (the notice target) is the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit”. It is a notice effect that can be announced in advance. In particular, a pre-reading notice effect that continuously gives notice over a variable display of decorative symbols that is executed a plurality of times in response to a plurality of special drawing games is also referred to as a continuous notice effect. In the pre-reading notice effect, before the variable display to be noticed is started, for example, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” based on the reserved memory of the special figure game due to the occurrence of the start winning prize, etc. The production operation is started. In contrast to the pre-reading notice effect, the notice effect that is executed after the variable display to be noticed is started is referred to as a single notice effect (also referred to as a single notice, a variable notice, or a variable indication notice effect). Is done.

  As an example of the pre-reading notice effect, the display part of the first hold display in the first hold display part 5HR and the display part of the second hold display in the second hold display part 5HL are different from the display form in the normal time. By changing to, a pre-reading notice effect of “pending display change” for notifying the possibility of “big hit” in the variable display to be noticed may be executed. More specifically, a specific color (for example, any one of red, green, blue, etc.) that is different from a predetermined color (for example, white) in a normal time is used as a display color in a display part that displays the number of special figure reservations to be specified. By so doing, it is only necessary to be able to notify that the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” is higher than usual. In addition, the display pattern in the first hold display and the second hold display is set to a specific pattern (for example, cherry blossom pattern) different from the normal time, so that the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” is higher than usual. May be able to be notified. Alternatively, by displaying a predetermined message (for example, “secret”) as the first hold display or the second hold display, it is notified that the possibility that the display color is changed to a specific color is higher than usual ( Suggest) Such a hold display that suggests that the display mode is likely to change to a specific mode is also referred to as a suggestion hold display. The pre-reading notice effect of “hold display change” is also called a hold display change effect.

  Further, as an example of the single notice effect, the display of the effect image on the active display unit AHA can be changed to a display mode different from the display mode at the normal time, so that it is possible to become a “big hit” in the variable display satisfying the start condition. A notice effect of “change in active display” for notifying the sex or the like may be executed. More specifically, the display color in the active display unit AHA is set to a specific color (for example, any one of red, green, and blue) that is different from a predetermined color (for example, white) at the normal time. What is necessary is just to be able to alert | report that possibility of becoming a "hit" is higher than usual. The notice effect of “active display change” is also referred to as an active display change effect.

  When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is “lost”, the variable display mode is “non-reach” (“normal” A case where the variable display mode is “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”). When the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display state of the decorative design is not reached after the variable display of the decorative design is started. Reach combination) is stopped (derived). When the variable display mode is “reach”, the reach presentation is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display is started, and finally the jackpot combination is A predetermined combination of decorative symbols (reach combination) that is not to be displayed is stopped (derived). The non-reach combination and the decorative symbols constituting the reach combination may be included in the non-specific display result together with the special symbol that becomes the lost symbol.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, gaming random number update processing, special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Processing for controlling the progress of the process is included.

  The switch processing is processing for determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. The main-side error process is a process of performing an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start-up information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

  As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side include a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern, The random number value MR5 for determining the figure display result may be included. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as the big hit gaming state. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. It is a random value used for The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. The random value MR5 for determining the usual figure display result indicates that the second start winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is in a closed state (normally open) with the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary figure game as “per figure”. It is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control to an open state (expanded open state) where game balls are likely to pass (enter) more frequently than (state).

  In the special symbol process included in the game control timer interrupt processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and displayed on the special symbol display device 4 Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of operations and opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process process controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 to variably display the normal symbol, set the tilting operation of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the like. It is a process that enables. In the normal symbol process, as the high opening control accompanying the short-time control, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses a normal symbol change time (normal symbol variation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state. Control to improve the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is “per normal” than in the normal state, the normal variable winning ball device based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal” Part or all of the control for making the tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the movable blade piece in 6B longer than that in the normal state and the control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state are performed.

  The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in the command control process, the output control board 12 among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. Thus, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102. And execute.

  FIG. 4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S101 of FIG. 3 as the start winning determination process. When the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first, based on a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. It is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the first special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), thereby It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When the number of first special figure reserved storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the start port that is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102 The buffer value is set to “1” (step S203).

  When the first start-up switch 22A is OFF in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), it is normal. It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6B ( Step S204). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is ON (step S204; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4”) (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), thereby It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S206).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S203 and S206, the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase (increment). Further, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase (increment). Thus, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure hold memory number is updated to increase by 1. When the second start condition is satisfied, the second special figure hold memory number is updated to increase by one. . At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S208).

  After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number circuit 104 or random data provided by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.) Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted. The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as reserved data by being set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210).

  In the process of step S210, for example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, the hold data is held. Data is set in the second special figure holding storage unit. The first special figure holding storage unit is a special game (not yet started), although the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and a first start winning is generated. The special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored as a hold memory. The second special figure holding storage unit is a special game that has not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a second start winning has occurred. (Special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored as a hold memory.

  The first special figure hold storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order of winning (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, for example, based on the establishment of the first start condition by the passage (entrance) of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc. as the hold data and storing them. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the first special figure storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Based on whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state, whether the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” is a plurality of types, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, It is the stored storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to reach the reach of super reach.

  For example, the second special figure holding storage unit is associated with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc. as the hold data and storing them. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Based on whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state, whether the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” is a plurality of types, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, It is the stored storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to reach the reach of super reach.

  Subsequent to the process of step S210, setting for transmitting a start opening prize designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S211). Subsequently, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S212). Then, the setting for transmitting the reserved memory number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S213). Further, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S214). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “2” (step S214; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S215), and then the start winning prize is obtained. The determination process ends. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S214; “1”), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S216). The process proceeds to step S204. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect an effective winning of a game ball at the same time, it is possible to reliably complete the processing based on the detection of both effective starting winnings.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S212 of FIG. 4 as the winning random number determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result is set to “big hit” in the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 3, FIG. 8) described later. Determination of whether or not to perform control, determination of variation pattern, and the like are performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 performs the winning random number value determination process in step S212 at the start winning timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (first start winning opening or second start winning opening). By executing this, it is determined whether or not the random symbol value MR1 is determined to derive the jackpot symbol as the special symbol display result, and the random value MR3 is determined to be a variation pattern in which the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is the reach state. It is determined whether or not. As a result, whether or not the special symbol display result becomes “big hit” before the variable symbol special symbol display or decorative symbol display based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the start prize opening is started. Whether to reach a reach state during variable display of symbols, and based on this prediction result, whether or not to execute a notice effect as a pre-read effect by the effect control CPU 120 on the effect control board 12 side or not Can be determined.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 5, the CPU 103 first checks the state of a time-short flag or a probability change flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102, for example. The current gaming state in the machine 1 is specified (step S401). More specifically, when the probability change flag is ON, the gaming state is a probability change state, when the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is ON, the game state is a time reduction state, and both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are both What is necessary is just to specify that it is a normal state when it is OFF, respectively. Further, by checking the value of a special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag control unit) of the RAM 102, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit gaming state. It only needs to be identified.

  The CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state identified in this way is a big hit in which the big hit gaming state is set (step S402). At this time, if it is determined that the big hit is not being made, it is further determined whether or not the high base in which the high opening control associated with the time reduction control is being performed in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S403). When it is determined in step S402 that it is a big hit (step S402; Yes), or when it is determined in step S403 that it is in a high base (step S403; Yes), the start port buffer value is “2”. It is determined whether or not (step S404).

  When it is determined in step S403 that the vehicle is not in high base (step S403; No), or when it is determined in step S404 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S404; Yes), FIG. The variable display contents are determined using the random number extracted in the process of step S209 shown in (step S405). In this embodiment, the variable display contents to be determined at the time of starting winning are “big hit”, “super reach determination at the time of loss”, “reach determination at the time of loss”, and “general at the time of loss”.

  The CPU 101 sets a big hit determination range in order to determine whether or not the variable display content is “big hit”. For example, from a specific display result determination table prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, data used for determining a special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state (special figure display result determination table data) ) Is selected. In this special figure display result determination table data, the range of the determined value assigned with the special figure display result “big hit” may be set as the big hit determination range. This jackpot determination range is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in the process of step S209. At this time, if the random value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination range, the variable display content is determined as “big hit”.

  Corresponding to the fact that the random display value MR1 is outside the range of the big hit determination range, and it is determined that the variable display content is not “big hit”, the super reach determination range or reach determination range at the time of losing is set. Regardless of the number of special figure hold memories, the super reach determination range and reach determination range at the time of losing can be determined as a random pattern that can be determined as a variation pattern with reach production including super reach or normal reach (disturbance for determining variation pattern). The range of the numerical value MR3) may be determined in advance.

  When variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, a random pattern MR3 for determining a variation pattern and a variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance are prepared. Of the plurality of variation patterns, the variation pattern used in the current variable display is determined. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is assigned to one of a plurality of variation patterns. The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern to which the determined value matching the random value MR3 is assigned as the variation pattern used in the current variable display. For example, in the variation pattern determination table used at the time of losing when the variable display result is “lost”, as shown in FIG. 11 (B1) and FIG. It differs depending on the number of figure hold memory and the number of second special figure hold memory. However, some of the determined values are assigned to the same (or the same type) variation pattern regardless of the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number. The range of decision values assigned to the variation pattern with super reach among the decision values assigned to the variation pattern with super reach in the table data constituting such a variation pattern determination table. However, what is necessary is just to be predetermined as a super reach fixed range. In addition, in the table data constituting the variation pattern determination table, among the determined values allocated to the variation pattern with the reach effect including the normal reach, it is allocated to the variation pattern with the reach effect regardless of the number of special figure holding memories. The determined value range may be determined in advance as the reach determination range.

  FIG. 6 shows an example of determination of the variation pattern at the time of losing when the variable display result is “lost”. When the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state without time-saving control, a variation pattern determination table in which determined values are assigned to the variation patterns as shown in FIG. 11 (B1) is used. In this case, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the first special figure reserved memory number. . On the other hand, if the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “271” to “300”, it is uncertain whether super-reach is involved or not according to the first special figure reserved memory number. It is determined that the change pattern is determined to have a reach effect including a normal reach regardless of at least the first special figure reserved memory number.

  In addition, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability change state with time reduction control or a time reduction state, a change pattern determination table in which determination values as shown in FIG. 11 (B2) are assigned to the change patterns is used. It is done. In this case, if the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the second special figure reserved storage number. . On the other hand, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “289” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with normal reach is determined regardless of the second special figure reserved memory number. .

  The special figure hold memory number (the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number) when the start winning occurs coincides with the special figure hold memory number when the variable display is actually started. Not limited to this, there may be a change due to execution of variable display or generation of a new start prize after the start prize has been generated. For this reason, the table data selected due to the difference in the number of reserved special figure storage may not match between the determination result at the time of starting winning and the determination of the changing pattern at the start of variable display. It is generally difficult to predict whether or not to be determined. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination table in this embodiment, when the variable display result is `` lost '', at least the determination value assigned to the variation pattern with super reach or the variation pattern with reach effect including normal reach is A common decision value is included regardless of the number of special figure holds. Therefore, whether or not it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the number of special figure holding memories at the time of starting winning or variable display start in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the reach effect including the normal reach It can be determined whether or not it is determined to be determined to be a variation pattern involving.

  When the variable display result is “losing” in the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, the variable display content If the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “271” to “300”, the variable display content is “reach determination at lose”. judge. If the variable display result is “losing” during the time reduction in which the time reduction control is being performed, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, the variable display content Is determined to be “super reach determination at the time of loss”, and if the random number knowledge MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “289” to “300”, the variable display content is “reach determination at the time of loss” judge.

  When it is determined in step S404 shown in FIG. 5 that the start port buffer value is “1” instead of “2” (step S404; No), a setting for restricting determination at the time of winning in the process of step S405 is performed. This is performed (step S406). Thus, when the high opening control accompanying the short-time control is performed or when the game is in the big hit gaming state, it is based on the occurrence of the starting winning (first starting winning) due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first starting winning opening. Restrict the variable display contents from being judged. Thus, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the first start is performed during the high opening control or the big hit gaming state. The soundness of the game can be ensured by restricting the pre-reading notice based on winning a prize from being executed.

  After that, the notification contents at the time of starting winning according to the determination result by the process of step S405 and the setting by the process of step S406 are set (step S407). In accordance with such notification contents, a setting for transmitting a winning determination result command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S408), and the winning random number determination processing is terminated.

  FIG. 7A shows a start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command and second starting opening winning designation command), a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command and second reserved memory number notification). Command), a determination example of a winning determination result command. In this embodiment, a command B100H serving as a first start opening winning designation command and a command B200H serving as a second starting opening winning designation command are prepared in advance as start opening winning designation commands. Note that the subscript H indicates a hexadecimal number. In addition, as a reserved memory count notification command, a command C1XXH serving as a first reserved memory count notification command and a command C2XXH serving as a second reserved memory count notification command are prepared in advance. XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the reserved memory count notification command, different EXT data (for example, any one of 00H to 04H) is set according to the special figure reserved memory count. Further, a command C4XXH serving as a winning determination result command is prepared in advance.

  When a game ball that has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) occurs, the steps shown in FIG. When it is determined in the process of S202 that the first special figure reservation storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the first start condition is established. The first start condition is a condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the first start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to “1” in the process of step S203 shown in FIG. A first start opening winning designation command is transmitted to 12. In addition, a winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing transmission setting by the process of step S408 shown in FIG. Further, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing the transmission setting by the process of step S213 shown in FIG. Is done.

  FIG. 4 shows a case where a game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning (second start winning) is generated. If it is determined in step S205 that the second special figure reservation storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the second start condition is satisfied. The second start condition is a condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S206 shown in FIG. 4 and then the transmission setting is performed by the process of step S211. A second start opening winning designation command is transmitted to 12. In addition, a winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing transmission setting by the process of step S408 shown in FIG. Further, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing the transmission setting by the process of step S213 shown in FIG. Is done.

  On the side of the production control board 12, it is possible to detect the establishment of the first start condition by receiving the first start opening prize designation command, and to detect the establishment of the second start condition by receiving the second start opening prize designation command. it can. Thus, the first start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the first start condition. The second start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the second start condition. The determination result command at the time of winning is when the first starting prize is detected when the game ball has passed (entered) through the first starting prize opening or when the gaming ball has passed (entered) through the second start prize opening. At the time of the second start winning, the comparison result (the determination result at the time of winning) using the game random number extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like (the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result) is sent to the effect control board 12 side. To notify. The first reserved memory count notification command notifies the first special figure reserved memory count. The second reserved memory count notification command notifies the second special figure reserved memory count. In this embodiment, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when the game ball passes (enters) either through the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Notifying whether it occurred, it is transmitted as hold notification information for designating which of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number has increased.

  The first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command correspond to the case where the execution of the special game is started when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. May be transmitted. Alternatively, when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number addition designation command (the second reserved figure number designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted. Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, or together with the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, the total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number May be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be used.

  FIG. 7B exemplifies the contents of notification by a winning determination result command. Of the winning determination result commands shown in FIG. 7B, the command C402H, the command C203H, and the command C404H may be transmitted when the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is not within the jackpot determination range. The winning determination result is notified that the variable display result is determined to be “losing” and is not controlled to the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, the command C401H is transmitted when the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the jackpot determination range, and when the winning is determined that the variable display result is determined to be “hit” and controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The determination result (variable display content is “big hit”) is notified. The command C402H is transmitted when the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the super-reach determination range at the time of losing, and the winning determination result (variable display content) that the variation pattern with super-reach is determined at the time of losing Will notify you of “Super reach when lost”. The command C403H is transmitted when the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the reach determination range at the time of losing, and the winning determination result (variable display content is determined to be a variation pattern with a reach effect at the time of losing. “Reach when lost”). The command C404H is transmitted when the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is not within the super reach determination range or reach determination range at the time of losing, and when winning a prize that there is a possibility that the variation pattern with reach effect may not be determined Notification of the determination result (variable display content is “general when lost”). In this way, the winning determination result command uses the game random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or whether it is determined to a specific variation pattern. Is transmitted as determination result information for notifying the determination result at the time of winning.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 shown in FIG. 3 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the first special symbol display unit 4A, the second special symbol reservation storage unit, the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the like are stored on the basis of the presence or absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determined by the variable display result. Make a decision (predetermined) before being displayed. At this time, when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, the big hit type is determined as one of a plurality of types. The data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, whereby the jackpot type is stored. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) One of the lost symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. The variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is set in advance corresponding to the variation pattern. Accordingly, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the deriving of the definite special symbol resulting in the variable display result is determined. The variation pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to “reach” by determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is “lost” in the variation pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for performing a setting for varying the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4, a process for measuring an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary, and the like. . When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. This special symbol stop process includes a process of setting the special symbol display device 4 to stop the change of the special symbol and to stop and display the confirmed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result. Then, it is determined whether or not a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is turned on. When the big hit flag is ON, the transmission setting of the hit start designation command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result being “big hit” is set, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to “ Update to 4 ". When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The pre-opening process for the big hit is based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”, etc., and the process for starting the execution of the round game in the big hit gaming state and setting the winning prize opening to the open state, etc. It is included. When the big hit release pre-processing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, a number of game balls detected by the measured elapsed time and the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the big winning opening is in an open state has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, “2” or “15” depending on the type of jackpot) And the process of waiting until the next round game is started when the upper limit number has not been reached. When the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, while when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number, the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. Is updated.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until time elapses, processing that performs various settings for controlling to the probability variation state and the time-short state corresponding to success or failure of the probability variation control condition, and the like are included. Then, when the setting for controlling to the probability change state or the time reduction state is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 3 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 only has to read the second reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; No), it is stored in the head area (storage area corresponding to the reservation number “1”) of the second special figure reservation storage unit. Numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read out as the reserved data that has been stored (step S232). Thereby, the game random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning (second start winning) at the second start winning opening in the process of step S209 shown in FIG. 4 are read. The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S233). For example, the second special figure hold storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time. shift. Further, in the process of step S233, the total number of reserved storages may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 only has to read the first reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. Thus, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  When the special game is executed in the order in which the game balls have passed (entered) the start winning opening regardless of whether the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, A start area data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the start prize opening or the second start prize opening is associated with the hold number or separately from the hold data, and is associated with the hold number in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 And the order in which the start conditions are established can be specified for the special game corresponding to each hold data.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S237). For example, the first special figure reservation storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time. shift. Further, in the process of step S237, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be decremented by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special figure display result, which is the special symbol variable display result, is determined as either “big hit” or “losing” (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result as to whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As long as it is assigned. The CPU 103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read from the variation random number buffer.

  In the process of step S239, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state and the probability variation control is performed, the special figure is displayed at a higher rate than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the short time state. The display result is determined as “big hit”. The probability variation state is started when the probability variation flag is set to the ON state corresponding to the case where the big hit type is “probability variation” or “surprise probability” by the big hit end processing in step S117 shown in FIG. 3, for example. Is done. When the probability variation state is in effect, the special figure display result is likely to be a “hit” and more likely to be a big hit gaming state than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the short time state.

  CPU103 determines whether the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is "big hit" (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” (step S240; Yes), a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is set to an on state (step S241). . Further, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set in a use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value for determining the big jackpot type includes a plurality of jackpot types. It suffices if it is assigned to the determination result of either type. The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2 read from the variation random number buffer.

  After executing the process of step S242, the big hit type is stored (step S243). The CPU 103 may store the jackpot type by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control buffer setting unit).

  When the special figure display result is not “big hit” in step S240 (step S240; No), or after executing the process of step S243, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is determined. (Step S244). As an example, when it is determined in step S240 that the special symbol display result is not “big hit”, the special symbol predetermined as the lost symbol is determined as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, any of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols is determined according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S242. Can be determined as a confirmed special symbol.

  After executing the process of step S244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” (step S245), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” in step S245, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process in step S111 shown in FIG. 3 is executed.

  In step S235, when the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S246), the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 3 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is ON (step S261; Yes), the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined (step S262). On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off (step S261; No), a variation pattern corresponding to the time of loss when the special figure display result is “lost” is determined (step S263).

  In the process of step S262, for example, a big hit fluctuation pattern is determined using a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, for example. In the big hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” by referring to the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern reading read from the random number buffer for fluctuation. What is necessary is just to determine a fluctuation pattern. In the process of step S263, for example, a variation pattern at the time of the loss is determined using a loss variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, for example. In the loss variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result is “lost” by referring to the loss variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern random number MR3 read from the variation random number buffer. What is necessary is just to determine a fluctuation pattern.

  FIG. 10 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result (special drawing display result) is “lost”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” which does not reach the reach state, and the reach state is reached. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of the cases of “reach” and the case of the variable display result (special drawing display result) being “big hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as a non-reach loss variation pattern), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is “reach” is This is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a reach loss variation pattern). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect in normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect in super reach is executed.

  FIG. 11 shows an example of determining a big hit variation pattern or a loss variation pattern. In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 9, for example, a variation pattern at the time of big hit is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 11A, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-3 are determined as the usage patterns at the ratio shown in FIG. In the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 9, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. Further, in the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 9, when the time reduction control is being performed, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. 11 (B2), for example. In the process of step S263, by determining the variation pattern at the time of losing, it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “lost”. It should be noted that whether or not to reach the reach state may be determined when the variable display result is “lost” by a process separate from the determination of the variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, the determined values assigned to the variation patterns accompanied by the reach effect in the super reach such as the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-3 are the reach in the normal reach such as the variation pattern PA3-1. It is set so as to be larger than the determined value assigned to the variation pattern accompanied by the effect. On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIG. 11B1 and FIG. 11B2, the determined values assigned to the variation pattern with reach effect in normal reach, such as the variation pattern PA2-1, are the variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2. It is set to be larger than the determined value assigned to the variation pattern with the reach effect in the super reach such as -3. As a result, when the variable display result is derived after the reach effect in the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” (expected degree of big hit) is increased.

  In the determination example shown in FIG. 11 (B1), a determination value assigned to a different variation pattern is included depending on whether the first special figure reservation storage number is 0, 1 or 2 or more. As a specific example, the determined value in the range of “159” to “180” is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-1 if the first special figure reserved memory number is 0, and the first special figure reserved memory number is 1. If it is, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-2, and if the first special figure reservation storage number is 2 or more, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-3. With such a setting, the average variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols can be varied according to the number of first special symbol reservations stored. In particular, when the first special figure reserved memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, “2”), the average variable display time is shortened compared to when the first special figure reserved memory number is less than the predetermined value. It is sufficient that a determination value is assigned to each variation pattern so that In normal times when the time reduction control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the first special figure reservation memory number is a predetermined value (for example, “0”) regardless of the second special figure reservation memory number. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data. Alternatively, regardless of the second special figure holding memory number when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, refer to the table data corresponding to the first special figure holding memory number at that time. The variation pattern may be determined. Alternatively, corresponding to the fact that the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, regardless of the second special figure holding memory number, FIG. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to table data that is different from the determination value B1). Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the “first special figure reserved memory number” shown in FIG. 11 (B1) is replaced with the “second special figure reserved memory number”. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data corresponding to the second special figure reserved storage number.

  In the example of determination shown in FIG. 11 (B2), a determination value assigned to a different variation pattern is included depending on whether the second special figure reservation storage number is 0, 1 or 2 or more. With such a setting, the average variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols can be varied according to the number of second special symbol reservations stored. In particular, when the second special figure reserved memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, “2”), the average variable display time is shortened compared to when the second special figure reserved memory number is less than the predetermined value. It is sufficient that a determination value is assigned to each variation pattern so that During the time-saving control, the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second start winning opening, and the special game using the second special figure is frequently executed. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure game using the second special figure is repeated if the time is short. The possibility of being executed is high, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the first special figure is low. When the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the second special figure holding memory number is zero. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the second special figure reservation memory number is a predetermined value (for example, “0”) regardless of the first special figure reservation memory number. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to table data that is different from the determination value allocation shown in FIG. 11B2 regardless of the first special figure reservation storage number. Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the “second special figure reserved memory number” shown in FIG. 11 (B2) is read as the “first special figure reserved memory number”. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data corresponding to the first special figure reserved storage number.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S262 and S263, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time is set (step S264). The special figure change time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special display result) is derived and displayed. It is. As shown in FIG. 10, the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. Therefore, the special figure fluctuation time is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern in the processing of steps S262 and S263. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which a special symbol or decorative symbol variable display result is derived by setting the special symbol variation time.

  Following the process of step S264, a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are started. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special symbol games for which the condition is satisfied (step S265). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  After the process of step S265 is executed, a command transmission setting at the time of starting the change of the special symbol is performed (step S266). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, a first variation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is designated. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the second variation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated.

  The first variation start command and the second variation start command use the variation start in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. This is an effect control command for designating the start of fluctuation in the special figure game. The variation pattern designation command is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative design. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

  After executing the process of step S266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” (step S267), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in step S267, when the next timer interruption occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 3 is executed.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main process shown in FIG. 12 is executed. When the production control main process is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S 51), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the CTC (mounted on the production control board 12. (Register / counter circuit) register setting, etc. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S52). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S52; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off, and command analysis processing is executed (step S54). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. In the command analysis process, for example, when there is a reception command stored in the production control command reception buffer, it is determined which production control command has been received by confirming the MODE data of the reception command.

  Subsequent to the command analysis process, an error notification process (step S55) is executed. In the error notification process, for example, an error image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is displayed on the image display device 5 under control of the effect control CPU 120, or a sound for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or output.

  Following the error notification process, an effect control process is executed (step S56). In the effect control process, for example, various operations such as an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and a lighting operation in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are performed. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using the rendering device, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed. Following the effect control process, an effect random number update process is executed (step S57), and numerical data indicating the effect random number counted by the random counter in the RAM 122 is used by the software as various random values used for effect control. Update. After execution of the effect random number update process, the process returns to step S52.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S54 of FIG. 12 as command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer, etc. to determine whether or not there is a received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15. Is determined (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (step S501; NO), the command analysis process is terminated.

  If there is a received command in step S501 (step S501; YES), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is a jackpot start designation command (step S502). ). If the command is a big hit start designation command (step 502; YES), it is updated so as to add 1 to the consecutive-chan count count value K (step S503), and the process returns to step S501. The continuous channel count value K is a value stored in a continuous channel counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and may be any value that indicates the continuous channel count. Here, the continuous change means that the variable display result becomes “big hit” when the probability change state or the time saving state is set, and the control is changed to the probability change state or the time reduction state even after the big hit gaming state is finished. That means. In addition, the number of consecutive changes means that the variable display result is “big hit” when the probability change state or the short time state is reached, and it is continuously controlled that the probability change state or the short time state is controlled even after the big hit gaming state ends. Say the number of times.

  If the received command is not a jackpot start designation command in step S502 (step S502; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a big prize opening prize designation command (step S504). If it is a big winning opening prize designation command (step S504; YES), the prize ball number count value is updated to be added by 15 (step S505). The winning ball count value is a value stored in a winning ball counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and may be any value indicating the number of winning balls. Here, the number of winning balls means the number of game balls paid out for winning in the big winning opening during the big hit.

  After executing the process of step S505, the cumulative prize ball count value is updated to be added by 15 (step S506), and the process returns to step S501. The cumulative prize ball count value is a value stored in a cumulative prize ball counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and may be any value indicating the cumulative prize ball number. Here, the cumulative number of winning balls refers to the number of game balls that are paid out for winning in the big winning opening during the big hits in the chain. In addition, both the number of winning balls and cumulative number of winning balls, including the number of payouts for winning in the first and second starting winning mouths and the general winning mouth, may be the number of game balls paid out as winning balls during the big hit. Good. Further, if it is not a big hit (if the value of the effect process flag is not 3 to 5), it is not necessary to add the prize ball count value and the cumulative prize ball count value.

  If the received command is not a big prize winning designation command in step S504 (step S504; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a big hit end designation command (step S507). If the command is a jackpot end designation command (step S507; YES), the winning ball counter is cleared to initialize the count value to “0” (step S508), and the process returns to step S501.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and 15 game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. Thus, the winning ball count value is incremented by 15 and the count value is initialized to “0” in response to the end of the current jackpot gaming state, thereby controlling the jackpot gaming state. Each time, the number of game balls paid out for winning in the big winning opening during the big hit is counted.

  If the received command is not a jackpot end designation command in step S507 (step S507; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a gaming state designation command (step S509). If it is a gaming state designation command (step S509; YES), it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is ended based on the received gaming state designation command (step S510). When the time-shortening control is finished (step S510; YES), the count value is initialized to “0” by clearing the cumulative prize ball number counter (step S511).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning opening in the continuous game, a winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and 15 game balls are paid out as a winning ball every time it is detected. The accumulated prize ball count value is incremented by 15 and the count value is initialized to “0” in response to the end of the chain, so that The number of game balls paid out in response to winning in the big winning opening during the big hit is counted.

  After executing the process of step S511, the count value is reset to “0” by clearing the continuous number of times counter (step S512), and the process returns to step S501.

  As described above, in this embodiment, every time the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the count value K of consecutive chants is incremented by 1 and the count value K is “ By being initialized to “0”, the number of consecutive chunks is counted.

  If the received command is not a gaming state designation command in step S509 (step S507; NO), after setting according to other received commands (step S513), the process returns to step S501.

  In the above, the example of clearing the continuous channel count counter immediately after the time-shortening control is finished (step S512) has been shown, but within a specific period (for example, after returning to the low probability low base state) (for example, If it becomes a big hit again within 20 revolutions), it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the continuous number of times can be taken over.

  In the command analysis process, for example, when (i) a winning determination result command and a first reserved memory number notification command are received together with the first start opening winning designation command, a predetermined area (for example, an effect control buffer setting) of the RAM 122 is received. The first start opening prize designation command and the first reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area having the smallest reserved display number as the buffer number among the free areas in the first start prize command buffer provided in the Or (ii) a second start provided in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 122 or the like when the second reserved memory number notification command is received together with the second start opening winning designation command. Stores the smallest pending display number as the buffer number among the free areas in the command buffer at the time of winning a prize The frequency control is also performed or to store a second start hole winning designation command a second holding memory number notification command in sequence.

  The first start prize command buffer is associated with one set of effect control commands (first start slot prize designation command and first reserved memory number notification command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the first start prize. A storage area is reserved for storage. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control commands received when the first start winning is generated, corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4” in the first start winning command buffer according to the receiving order. Are stored in order from the beginning of the empty area. The hold display number in the first start winning command buffer corresponds to the first special figure hold memory number.

  The second start prize command buffer is associated with one set of effect control commands (second start opening prize designation command and second reserved memory number notification command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the second start prize. A storage area is reserved for storage. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control commands received when the second start winning is generated, in accordance with the reception order, corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4” of the second start winning command buffer. Are stored in order from the beginning of the empty area. The hold display number in the second start winning command buffer corresponds to the second special figure hold memory number.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S55 of FIG. 12 as the error notification process. In this error notification process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is an error notification period based on, for example, a notification control pattern (step S141).

  If it is not the error notification period in step S141 (step S141; NO), it is determined whether a magnetic abnormality notification designation command has been received (step S142). At this time, if no magnetic abnormality notification designation command is received (step S142; NO), the error notification processing is terminated.

  If a magnetic abnormality notification designation command is received in step S142 (step S142; YES), after performing operation control for executing error notification in the highest layer (step S143), the error notification processing is terminated. To do. Further, even when it is the error notification period in step S141 (step S141; YES), after performing the operation control for executing error notification in the highest layer (step S143), the error notification process is performed. finish. For example, in the process of step S143, in order to execute error notification according to a predetermined notification mode in accordance with notification control execution data read from a notification control pattern prepared in advance for executing error notification, various commands are issued. What is necessary is just to produce and transmit with respect to the display control part 123, the audio | voice control board | substrate 13, the lamp | ramp control board | substrate 14, etc. FIG. Thereby, for example, error notification such as displaying an error notification image as shown in FIG. 34A on the uppermost layer is executed.

  The error notification image shown in FIG. 34A corresponds to the message “Error occurred! And a pictogram image AR1 indicating a pictogram for notifying that an error has occurred. The pictogram image AR1 only needs to be displayed in a predetermined display mode corresponding to the error notification. The error notification image display time (error notification notification period) may be, for example, 30 seconds. The display time of the error notification image may be varied depending on the type of error.

  In the present embodiment, an error notification image, a probability change confirmation notification effect image for probability change confirmation notification effect as a third notification for notifying that a predetermined probability change control condition has been established, and a winning ball during a big hit as a specific period As the first notification for notifying the number of prize balls that have been paid out, the prize ball number notification effect image for the notification of the number of winning balls and the continuous number of times for notification of the consecutive number of times as the fourth notification for notifying the number of consecutive times Other effect images such as the jackpot / medium name music name notification image for the big hit / medium name notification as the fifth notification for notifying the music name being played during the jackpot and the music name being played during the jackpot are arranged in different layers. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35A, an error notification image, a probability change confirmation notification effect image, a winning ball number notification effect image, and other effect images are superimposed on each image data. The Z value used for drawing is set, and the RAM 122 that provides the work area of the effect control CPU 120 has an error notification image, a probability change confirmation notification effect image, a winning ball number notification effect image, and others. A Z value setting table for setting the Z value of the image data of the effect image is stored. In this Z value setting table, Z values used when drawing an image are registered in association with items of each image data.

  As shown in FIG. 35B, an image having a small Z value is drawn on the near side, and an image having a large Z value is drawn on the far side. That is, an image with a small Z value is drawn so as to overlap an image with a large Z value, and an image with a small Z value is preferentially displayed. That is, it can be visually recognized that an image having a small Z value is on the near side for the player.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35A, the Z value of the error notification image is set to “0”, the Z value of the probability change confirmation notification effect image is set to “1”, and the prize ball The Z value of the number notification effect image is set to “2”, and the Z value of the other effect images such as the continuous change number notification image and the big hit medium song name notification image is set to “3” and registered. In other words, when performing an effect process when the attacker opens, which will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 preferentially displays the award ball number notification effect image over the continuous number of times notification image or the jackpot music name notification image, and the prize ball Control is performed such that the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed with priority over the number notification effect image, and the error notification image is displayed with priority over the probability change determination notification effect image.

  Note that the Z value is set to “2” not only for the award ball number notification effect image, but also for the cumulative number of award balls that have been paid out as a winning ball during a big hit during consecutive times as a special period. The cumulative prize ball number notification effect image for the cumulative prize ball number notification effect as the second notification is also set to “2” in the Z value. Furthermore, not only an error notification image, a probability change confirmation notification effect image, a prize ball number notification effect image, a cumulative prize ball number notification effect image, a continuous number of times notification image, a jackpot song name notification image, a background image as a background, etc. Z values are also set, and for these background images and the like, a larger Z value is set than the continuous change number notification image and the big hit middle song name notification image.

  Further, the priority of the probability change confirmation notification effect image may be subdivided. For example, when it is the first hit (that is, when the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed for the first hit), when it is a consecutive change (that is, the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed for the second and subsequent changes) The Z value of the probability change confirmation notification effect image may be different. Further, the Z value of the probability change confirmation notification effect image may be varied depending on the number of consecutive channels. It should be noted that the display mode (design, wording, etc.) of the probability change confirmation notification effect image may be different depending on whether it is the initial hit or the continuous change (and how many continuous changes).

  Moreover, you may subdivide the priority of a prize ball number notification effect image. For example, the Z value of the prize ball number notification effect image may be different between the case where the number of prize balls is “2000” and the case where the number of prize balls is “2400”. It should be noted that the display mode (color, wording, design, etc.) of the prize ball number notification effect image may be varied depending on whether the number of prize balls is “2000” or “2400”.

  Moreover, you may subdivide the priority of a cumulative prize ball number notification effect image. For example, the Z value of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image may be different between the case where the cumulative prize ball number is “5000” and the case where the prize ball number is “10000”. Note that the display mode (color, wording, design, etc.) of the accumulated prize ball notification effect image may be different depending on whether the number of prize balls is “5000” or “10000”.

  Further, the priority of the continuous change count notification image may be subdivided. For example, the Z value of the continuous channel number notification image may be made different depending on the continuous channel number notification image. Note that the display mode (color, wording, design, etc.) of the continuous channel number notification image may be varied depending on the number of continuous channels.

  Also, the priority of the jackpot song name notification image may be subdivided. For example, the Z value of the jackpot music name notification image may be varied according to the music (the type of the music, the number of times the music is played today, etc.). Note that the display mode (color, wording, design, etc.) of the jackpot music name notification image may be varied according to the music.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 15, the effect control CPU 120 executes the volume status display process (step S162) and the jackpot music determination process (step S163), and then performs steps S170 to S170 depending on the value of the effect process flag. One of the processes in step S175 is performed. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Variable display start waiting process (step S170): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” that is a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171).

  Variable display start setting process (step S171): Control is performed so as to start the variation of the decorative symbol (effect symbol). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display effect processing (step S172).

  Effect processing during variable display (step S172): Controls the switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern and monitors the end of the fluctuation time. When the variation time is over, based on the reception of the effect control command (design determination command) for instructing the stop of all symbols, control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). . The value of the production process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S173).

  Special figure waiting process (step S173): After the variation time is over, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the image display device 5 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process when the attacker is released (step S174).

  Attacker opening effect processing (step S174): Control during a big hit game is performed. For example, when a command for opening a special prize opening or a command for opening a special prize opening is received, display control of the number of rounds in the image display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process (step S175).

  Ending effect processing (step S175): In the image display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170).

  In the effect control process, the hold display setting process may be executed before executing steps S170 to S175. The hold display setting process is performed, for example, when the first start prize or the second start prize is generated and the first hold display on the first hold display section 5HR or the second hold display on the second hold display section 5HL. For example, determination processing, setting processing, etc. for executing a pre-reading notice effect of “pending display change” using stored data of a holding display data storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 121, for example. including.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as will be described next, according to the player's operation (for example, based on the operation of the stick controller 31A by the player), the volume as an example of effect adjustment related to the game Adjustment is possible. That is, the volume from the speakers 8L and 8R can be changed according to the operation of the stick controller 31A by the player.

  In the effect control process shown in FIG. 15, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a volume state display process (step S162). The volume status display process includes a process for displaying the adjustment status of the volume adjustment. Specifically, the volume status display processing is performed in a game state other than the super reach effect, or in a state of waiting for a customer and not displaying an error (first state), whether or not the player operates the stick controller 31A or the like. Regardless of this, it includes a process for displaying the volume status display image VL (see FIGS. 24A, 25A, etc.) indicating the adjustment status of the volume adjustment on the display screen of the image display device 5 so as to be visible. It is out.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S162 of FIG. 15 as the volume status display process. In the volume status display process shown in FIG. 16, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the super reach effect is being performed (step S601). In the process of step S601, for example, it may be confirmed whether or not the change is a super reach change pattern and a reach effect period.

  When the super reach effect is not being performed in step S601 (step S601; No), it is determined whether or not the super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S602). The super reach operation flag is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick controller 31A during the super reach performance. Data indicating the ON state or the OFF state of the super reach operation flag is stored, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122.

  If the super-reach operation flag is not set to ON in step S602 (step S602; No), display control for displaying a volume status display on the image display device 5 is executed (step S603). As a result, as shown in FIG. 24, the volume status display image VL indicating the current volume output level is displayed on the image display device 5 as the volume status display. For example, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the volume status display image VL has five rectangular image display sections arranged side by side, and the volume corresponding to the current volume in the image display section. The image is displayed in such a manner that it is turned on from the left end (for three in FIG. 24A).

  Specifically, when the sound volume is a predetermined minimum level (the sound volume output is a low sound level that is suppressed more than usual and not the mute level), the image display is such that all five image display sections are turned off. Note that the lowest level may be the mute level. Further, in the case of the first level that is one level higher than the lowest level, the image display is in the form in which the leftmost image display section is lit. In the case of the second level, which is one level higher than the first level, the image display is in a state in which two image display sections from the left end are lit. In the case of a third level (that is, a normal level) that is one level higher than the second level, the image display is in a state in which three image display sections from the left end are lit. In the case of the fourth level, which is one higher than the third level, the image display is in a state in which four image display sections from the left end are lit. Further, in the case of the maximum level (fifth level), the image display is performed in such a manner that all five image display sections are lit. Thus, the player can grasp the current volume output level by looking at the volume status display image VL. In this embodiment, the volume state display image VL has a meter-type display mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a numerical formula display mode with numbers or numerical values or a color-type display mode (for example, blue → green) is used. It is possible to use various display modes, such as changing from yellow to red in order of the display to indicate that the red color is larger.

  If the super-reach operation flag is set (ON) in step S602 (step S602; Yes), display control for continuing the volume status display (display of the volume status display image VL) on the image display device 5 Is executed (step S604), and the super reach operation flag is reset to an off state (step S605). Steps S604 and S605 are processes for continuing the volume status display when a volume change operation is performed immediately before the end of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 27C described later. Thereby, the volume status display image VL displayed by performing the volume change operation immediately before the end of the super reach effect can be continuously displayed after the end of the super reach effect, and once at the end timing of the super reach effect. It can be prevented from being erased.

  After executing the process of step S603 or after executing the process of step S605, the presence / absence of a volume change operation is determined (step S606). If there is a volume change operation (step S606; Yes), the changed volume status display (display of the changed volume status display image VL) and the changed volume setting are executed (step S607). Specifically, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A (step S606; Yes), a display for displaying the changed volume status display image VL on the image display device 5 In addition to executing the control, the changed volume setting value is stored in the RAM 122, and the changed volume setting such as controlling the audio control board 13 so that the changed volume is output from the speakers 8L and 8R is executed (step) S607).

  For example, the stick controller 31A can be operated in the left-right direction, and when the player operates the stick controller 31A once in the right direction, the lit state of the image display section is increased by one. While being displayed on the image display device 5, the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased by one level. On the contrary, when the player operates the stick controller 31A once in the left direction, the volume state display image VL after the change in which the lighting state of the image display section is reduced by one is displayed on the image display device 5. The sound volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lowered by one level.

  After executing the process of step S607, it is determined whether or not the non-super-reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S608). The non-super-reach operation flag is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick controller 31A when the super-reach effect is not being performed. Data indicating the on state or off state of the operation flag other than the super reach is stored, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122.

  On the other hand, when there is no volume change operation (step S606; No), it is determined whether or not the operation flag other than the super reach is set to the on state (step S609).

  After executing the process of step S608 or when the non-super-reach operation flag is set to ON in step S609 (step S609; Yes), a predetermined period after the operation (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (step S610). When a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S610; Yes), the non-super-reach operation flag is reset to the off state (step S611). The predetermined period after the operation (for example, 3 seconds) may be until the predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses after the first operation, or when the operation is performed a plurality of times within the predetermined period, from the last operation. It may be until a predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses. In this embodiment, the predetermined period after the operation is set, but the predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) may elapse from the start of displaying the volume state display image VL.

  Returning to step S601, if the super reach effect is being performed (step S601; Yes), it is determined whether or not the non-super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S612). When the non-super-reach operation flag is in an off state (step S612; No), it is determined whether or not the super-reach operation flag is set in an on state (step S613). When the super reach operation flag is in the off state (step S613; No), a process for deleting the volume status display is executed (step S614). Steps S613 and S614 are processing for preventing the volume status display during the super reach effect as a general rule, as shown in FIG. Specifically, in the second state in which the super reach effect (specific effect) is executed, that is, in the game state during the super reach effect, as shown in FIGS. 24 (C) to (H) to be described later unless requested by the player. The volume status display image VL is not displayed on the image display device 5 (the volume status display image VL is deleted). Thus, the volume status display image VL can be prevented from being displayed during the execution of the super reach effect which is an example of the game effect (the effect including an important notice) that the player particularly wants to show, and the effect of the super reach effect can be prevented. Can be suppressed.

  When the non-super-reach operation flag is off in step S609 (step S609; No), if the predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation in step S610 (step S610; No), the process of step S611 is executed. After that, when the non-super-reach operation flag is set to the on state in step S612 (step S612; Yes), the super-reach operation flag is set to the on state in step S613 (step S613). ; Yes), after executing the process of step S614, the volume state display process is terminated.

  Note that according to the volume status display process (step S162) shown in FIG. 16, the volume status display image VL can be displayed even in the customer waiting state.

  In the effect control process shown in FIG. 15, the effect control CPU 120 executes a jackpot music determination process (step S163) following the volume state display process (step S162).

FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit mid-music determination process. Here, the jackpot song is a song that can be played during the jackpot game state, and in this embodiment, a plurality of types of songs are prepared. The prepared types of music will be described later.
In the jackpot music determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the jackpot is being hit (step S621). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the jackpot is being hit when the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received and the jackpot end designation command has not been received. If the value of the effect process flag is any of 3 to 5, it may be determined that the big hit is being made. When the big hit is being made (step S621; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the big hit is abrupt (step S622). For example, the CPU 12 for effect control determines whether or not the big hit corresponds to suddenly based on a special winning opening designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  When it is not a big hit (step S621; No) or when it is abrupt (step S622; Yes), the big hit middle music determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the jackpot is being hit (step S621; Yes) and not accurate (step S622; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the song determination flag is on (the jackpot song is determined). It is determined whether or not (step S623). Here, the music determined flag indicates whether or not the jackpot music has been determined, and is set to an on state in step S633, which will be described later, and cleared to an off state in step S636. Data indicating the on / off state of the music determined flag is stored, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122.

  When the music determination completed flag is off (the music during the big hit is not determined) (step S623; No), the effect control CPU 120 refers to the continuous number of times counter provided in the RAM 122 as described above, and the first hit ( It is determined whether or not the continuous count count value K = 1) (step S624).

  In step S624, when it is the first hit (K = 1) (step S624; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current jackpot is accompanied by a music-type reach (step S625). . Here, the music-type reach is a reach in which music corresponding to the type of the reach is reproduced during reach production. In this embodiment, as an example, as shown in FIG. 18A, super reach A to C is set as a music system reach. In the music-type reach, as shown in FIG. 18B, the music according to the reach type is reproduced in a predetermined manner during the super reach production. The music playback mode in the music system reach will be described together in the description of the production example described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S625, if it is a music-based reach jackpot (step S625; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a jackpot song according to the reach type (step S626). In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (A), if the reach type is Super Reach A, the jackpot song is determined as “Song A”, and if it is Super Reach B, the jackpot song is “Music”. B ”, and if it is Super Reach C, the big hit song is decided to be“ Song C ”.

  If it is not the first hit (K = 1) in Step S624 (Step S624; No), or if it is the first hit (Step S624; Yes), but not the music-based reach big hit (Step S625; No), it is for production control. The CPU 120 determines whether or not the first round in which the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state is “1” is being executed (step S627). For example, whether or not it is the first round can be determined by confirming which round number command is stored in the special command opening open designated command storage area.

  When the first round is being executed (step S627; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 outputs the specific part of the selected music piece (step S628). Specifically, the production control CPU 120 issues a command to the audio control board 13 to output the specific part of the currently selected music (in this embodiment, a so-called “rust” portion) to the audio control board 13. And the specific part of the selected music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. That is, in the process of step S628, only the chorus portion of the currently selected jackpot music is played.

Here, as shown in FIG. 18C, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of music that can be selected during the execution of the first round are prepared. Also, as shown in FIG. 18C, the number of music pieces that can be selected during the execution of the first round is set to increase in accordance with the increase in the number of consecutive chunks. Specifically, in this embodiment, three pieces of music (songs A to C) can be selected when 1 ≦ K ≦ 5 (K: the above-mentioned continuous number of times count value), and four when 6 ≦ K ≦ 10. Selectable from music (music A to D), selectable from 5 music (music A to E) if 11 ≦ K ≦ 15, selectable from 6 music (music A to F) if 16 ≦ K Has been.
For example, when K = 2, the number of songs that can be selected from the first hit (K = 1) increases by one, and when K = 3, the songs that can be selected from the first hit (K = 1). For example, the number of selectable songs may be sequentially increased by the number of consecutive chunks. Also, it is determined by lottery whether or not a new song can be selected each time a big hit is made and whether or not any kind of song can be selected, not according to the prescribed number of consecutive times. Also good. Further, in addition to the super reach A to C shown in FIG. 18A, for example, a super reach D that is executed only during probability change is provided, and when the big hit with the super reach D is reached, It may be configured such that the corresponding music piece D can be selected.

In addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 19B, the music selection is performed by displaying an image showing currently selectable music displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 19B is 1 ≦ K ≦ 5). This is done by placing the cursor CU on the corresponding music A to C display example). The music selection operation is performed, for example, when the player tilts the stick controller 31A in the vertical direction. In this case, the image indicating the music name moves in response to the operation, and the music corresponding to the image of the music positioned (instructed) on the cursor CU becomes the currently selected music (FIG. 19 ( B) is an example in which “Song A” is being selected). That is, in step S628, when the instruction object of the cursor CU moves to another music piece, the chorus portion of the moved music piece (the music piece currently designated by the cursor CU) is reproduced.
As shown in FIG. 18C, when music is added as the number of consecutive chunks increases, it is preferable that the initial position of the cursor CU be a position indicating the added music. . By so doing, it is possible to suitably notify the player of newly added music. However, when the same music piece is selected in the big hit of the previous predetermined time (for example, the previous two times), it is preferable to set the initial position of the cursor CU to the position indicating the same music piece. By doing so, it is possible to present music that suits the player's preference, which is user-friendly.

  In addition, it is good also as an aspect to which cursor CU moves according to selection operation with respect to the image which shows a music title. In addition, the method of indicating the currently selected music is not limited to the instruction by the cursor CU, and it is easier to visually recognize the image indicating the selected music than the image indicating the other music (for example, indicating the selected music). For example, a frame image surrounding the image may be displayed in a superimposed manner, or an image indicating the selected song may be shining), or an image indicating a song other than the selected song may be difficult to view or may not be visible. Further, at the time of music selection, the volume level may be increased and the music identification unit may be output. For example, if the current volume level is a normal level (the third level), a specific part is output at the fourth level or the fifth level (maximum level), or the current volume is selected when selecting a song. When the level is the lowest level or the first level, the specific unit may be output at the normal level when the music is selected.

  Further, the “specific part” is a part of the selected music and is different from the head of the music. In this embodiment, so-called “rust” is an example of a music specifying unit. Here, in this embodiment, each piece of music data of the songs A to F as the jackpot music is stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. And the music data which shows one music is comprised from several audio | voice data (for example, WAV, MP3 etc.) including the data for chorus (an example of specific part data) which show the audio | voice of chorus. Specifically, as illustrated for “Song A” in FIG. 19A, data indicating the entire song A includes intro data, A melody data, B melody data, chorus data, It is stored in the ROM 121 in a divided form such as outro data (each as separate audio data). The same applies to each of the songs B to F as other jackpot songs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the burden of data capacity compared to a configuration in which specific part data is stored in addition to data for one song. In addition, during a predetermined production such as during a reach production or a notice production of a music-type reach, a part of data of one piece of music (for example, data for B melody) is used alone, so that Only a part may be output. In this way, as in this embodiment, it is possible to take advantage of the configuration of storing data indicating one piece of music as divided data.

  As for the chorus data as an example of the specific part data, for each piece of music, for example, a part that is familiar, has an impact, and is assumed to be catchy is selected in advance as “rust”, and the chorus part Audio data may be prepared in advance as chorus data. In addition, for example, the song A is famous for “rust”, but the song C is more famous for “A melody”. In this case, for music C, the specific part is A melody (specific part data is data for A melody), and if music C is being selected in step S628, the A melody part may be reproduced. In addition, the jackpot music may include a so-called head chorus music (a music that starts with chorus). And the specific part may be the head of music (a characteristic intro or head rust). That is, the data used as the specific unit may be different depending on the music. Further, when the head chorus music is included in the jackpot music, the data used as the music data for the head chorus music may be common when the music is selected and after the music is determined. For example, at the time of selecting a music piece, the chorus data and the part data (for example, A melody) following the chorus are used to play back the chorus and the part following the chorus, and the same data is used after the music is determined. Then, the chorus and the part following the chorus may be connected and played.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a music determination operation has been performed following the process of step S <b> 628 (step S <b> 629). For example, the music determination operation is a pressing operation performed on the push button 31B, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine that there is a music determination operation when the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31B. When there is no music determination operation (step S629; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the closing timing of the special winning opening (step S630). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that it is the closing timing of the big prize opening when the first round big prize opening closing designation command is received from the main board 11. Then, when there is a music determination operation (step S629; Yes), or when it is the closing timing for closing the winning prize (step S630; No), the currently selected music is determined (step S631). That is, in this embodiment, when the music determination operation is performed before the grand prize opening is closed during execution of the first round, or when the grand prize opening is closed without performing the music determination operation, The selected music is determined to be a big hit music.

  As described above, in this embodiment, at the time of music selection, the specific part of the music being selected is played back, and there are a plurality of music determination methods at the time of music selection. For this reason, the production effect at the time of music selection can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S626 or step S631, the effect control CPU 120 stores the music information determined in step S626 or S631 in the RAM 122 (step S632), and sets the music determined flag to the on state (step S633). . In addition, the data which shows ON / OFF of a music determined flag is memorize | stored in the production | presentation control flag setting part of RAM122, for example.

  Returning to step S623, if the production control CPU 120 determines that the music determination completed flag is on (step S623; Yes), the big hit medium music determined in step S626 or S631 is reproduced (step S634). Subsequently, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit end timing (step S635), and if it is a big hit end timing (step S635; Yes), the reproduction of the music started to be played in step S634 is ended. The music determined flag is cleared to an off state (step S636).

  After the execution of the processes of steps S636 and S633, when the determination is NO in steps S621, S627, S630, and S635, or when the determination is YES in step S622, the big hit / medium determination process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (A), in the reach other than the music-type reach, the hit-hit song can be selected by the selection operation by the player during the execution of the first round (step S628 described above). Yes. In this embodiment, “reach: normal (big hit)” (variation pattern PA3-1) shown in FIG. 10 is prepared as a reach other than the music-type reach. Reach types such as “Reach D” and “Super Reach E” are prepared, and when the big hit is accompanied by the production of Super Reach D or Super Reach E, the selection operation by the player during the execution of the first round May be able to select a song with a big hit. Moreover, in the above example, the example in which the hit song during the first round can be selected is shown, but the song may be selected during other rounds, or the song may be selected across multiple rounds. It may be possible. The period during which the jackpot can be selected is arbitrary.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 19, a description will be given of the music playback mode when the jackpot music is selected and after the jackpot music is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (B), at the time of music selection, a specific part (“rust” as an example) of the music being selected is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (corresponding to step S628). The identification unit is continuously played until the selected music is determined. The length of the specific portion is a period until the currently selected music is determined (corresponding to a period from the start of the first round to the execution of the process of step S631. A period until the music determining operation is performed, Or when it is shorter than the execution period (for example, 29.5 seconds) of a 1st round, a specific part is repeatedly reproduced until the music in selection is determined. In addition, when the length of the specific part is shorter than the period until the selected music is determined, the part following the specific part in the selected music following the reproduction of the specific part (FIG. 19A In the example of), outro) indicated by “outro data” may be reproduced.

  In this embodiment, at the time of music selection, an image corresponding to the music being selected (hereinafter, music-corresponding image) is displayed in the display area VA1 shown in FIG. The music-corresponding image is, for example, a video such as PV (Promotion Video) or MV (Music Video) of the selected music, and when selecting the music, for example, a portion corresponding to the specific part of the video is reproduced in the display area VA1. To do. Note that the moving image as the music-corresponding image does not have to be reproduced from the part corresponding to the specific part of the music. For example, when music is selected, the music may be played from a specific part other than the head, but the moving image may be played from the head. Further, the music-corresponding image may be a still image showing an artist photo or the like instead of a moving image. Also, the music-corresponding image data may be stored in the ROM 121 or the like in a form (each as separate image data) divided for each part of the music, like the audio data of the music.

As shown in FIG. 19C, after the music is determined, the audio data divided into a plurality of pieces constituting the music data of the determined music (for example, intro data, A melody data, B melody data, The chorus data and the outro data are connected (that is, each part constituting one musical piece is reproduced in a time series without any interruption), and one musical piece is reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. The determined jackpot music playback mode (corresponding to the music playback mode in step S634) is, for example, as described in (a) to (c) below.
(A) After the music is determined during one round, the music is played from the continuation of the specific part that was played at the time of selection, or is played from the beginning of the music.
(B) In the second and subsequent rounds, the music is played from the beginning (for example, the music is played from the top in response to receiving the second winning prize opening opening designation command).
(C) In the case of K = 1 (step S624; Yes) and the music-type reach jackpot (step S625; Yes), the tune corresponding to the reach type is continued from the part that was being played during the super reach production. Play (for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (B), “Intro”, “A melody” and “B melody” of the music corresponding to the reach type are played during the super reach production. Play).
After the music is decided, it is played from the beginning (intro) of the music, and after the music has made a round to the end (outro) of the music in a state where the big hit has not ended yet, the game returns to the intro of the music and makes two rounds. The eyes may be replayed or may be replayed from rust (specific part) instead of the intro.

  Further, after the music is determined, the music corresponding image is displayed in, for example, the display area VA2 shown in FIG. 19C, which is larger than the display area VA1. The example shown in FIG. 19C is an example in which the display area VA2 is configured over the entire image display area of the image display device 5 after the music is determined. After the music is determined, for example, a moving image in which portions corresponding to the music playback portion are sequentially played back may be displayed in the display area VA2. Note that the music corresponding image displayed in the display area VA2 after the music is determined may also be a still image such as an artist photo. Moreover, the music corresponding | compatible image at the time of music selection and after a music determination should just be a thing from which a display mode differs. That is, the display mode may be changed by a method other than changing the position and size of the display area VA1 and the display area VA2 where the music-corresponding image is displayed. For example, the positions and sizes of the display area VA1 and the display area VA2 are the same, but in the music-corresponding image after the music is determined, there are no effects at the time of music selection (for example, a fade-in / fade-out effect or a bright lighting effect) Etc.) may be applied.

  Note that the operation means for performing the music selection operation and the determination operation is not limited to the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. The operation means may be, for example, a cross button that can be operated in the vertical and horizontal directions, a dial key that can be rotated, for example, or may be a touch operation or a press operation like a touch panel. . Moreover, any configuration that can detect the operation content according to the operation by the player is acceptable. For example, an arbitrary operation that is not limited to an instruction input action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. A sensor capable of detection may be used.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S171 in FIG. 15 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 20, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a final stop symbol or the like to be a finalized symbol as a variable symbol display result (step S321). As the process of step S321, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on the variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. To determine the final stop symbol. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and variable display result include “non-reach (loss)”, “reach (lack)”, “non-probability change (big hit)”, and “probability change (big hit)”. I just need it.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not changed to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is “lost”. " When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the reach lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result becomes “losing”. . When the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the short-time state. When the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big win”, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is changed to the probable state.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the production control CPU 120 uses the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R to display different (unmatched) decorative symbols as the final stop symbols. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left determined symbol that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, and stores the left determined symbol determination table that is stored and prepared in the ROM 121 in advance. By referring to this, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the right determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. For example, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. From the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined.

  When the variable display content is “reach”, the effect control CPU 120 displays the same (matching) decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R as the final stop symbols. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating random values for determining the left and right determined symbols that are updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, and stores the left and right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referencing or the like, among the confirmed decorative symbols, decorative symbols having the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are displayed. decide. Further, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the production random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. As a result, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, the effect control CPU 120 displays the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The same (matching) decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining the jackpot determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5, etc. A decorative symbol having the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed along with 5C and 5R is determined. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed, etc. It is only necessary to determine which one of the decorative design (depicted decorative design) and the probability variation design (for example, the decorative design indicating an odd number) is the final decorative design. In the jackpot promotion promotion, the combination of decorative symbols (non-probable variation jackpot combination) that reminds the user of the big hit but does not recall the probable state in the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the big hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state. This is an effect of notifying whether or not the state is surely changed at the end.

  As a specific example, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, a symbol to be a definite decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when the variable display content is “probability change (big hit)” and it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative design is determined from a plurality of types of probability change designs. On the other hand, when the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Accordingly, it is only necessary to prevent the promotion effect during the big hit from being executed despite the fact that the probability variation symbols are all derived and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols, so that the player is not distrusted.

  In the process of step S321, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)” or “probable change (big hit)”, whether or not to execute a probable change promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a jackpot promotion effect is determined. It may be determined. In the redraw lottery effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable big hit combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult to recognize or impossible to recognize that it is controlled to the probabilistic state, The player can recognize in a recognizable state that the decorative design of the probability variation big hit combination composed of the same probability variation design is stopped and displayed by variably displaying (revariing) the decoration symbol again and controlled. Note that there is a case in which the control of the probability variation state is not notified when the decoration symbol of the non-probable variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed after the decoration symbol is re-variable in the re-lottery effect. If it is determined in step S321 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed may be determined.

  Following the determination of the final stop symbol and the like in the process of step S321, a change effect setting process (FIG. 21) for performing execution settings such as a hold display change effect determined in the hold display setting process is executed (step S322). . In the change effect setting process, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on the stored contents of the hold display data storage unit.

  In the change effect setting process shown in FIG. 21, first, the stored content in the hold display data storage unit is updated (step S551). That is, the stored display data storage unit erases the storage data in the storage area corresponding to the hold number “1” and also corresponds to the storage areas lower than the hold number “1” (hold numbers “2” to “4”). The storage data in the storage area is shifted up by one entry. At this time, the stored data to be erased from the storage area corresponding to the hold number “1” in the hold display data storage unit may be read and stored in the hold display data buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hold display change timing which is the execution timing of the hold display change effect is reached (step S552). In the process of step S552, one or more change effect timing patterns stored in the hold display data storage unit whose storage contents have been updated by the process of step S551 match the hold numbers associated with the respective change effect timing patterns. It is determined whether or not the designation of the hold display change timing to be included is included.

  If it is determined in step S552 that the hold display change timing is reached (step S552; Yes), execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed (step S553). For example, in the process of step S553, the storage content of the hold display change pattern in the hold display data storage unit and the display mode in the current hold display are specified, and whether or not to change the display mode, and the change when changing What is necessary is just to make it the setting for performing the setting of a later display mode, a pending | holding display change common effect, etc. In the process of step S553, the display color change effect execution setting for changing the display color of the active display based on the determination result of the hold display change pattern may be performed among the active display change effects. As the execution setting of the display color change effect, for example, the hold display change pattern shown in the stored data of the hold display data buffer (stored data deleted from the hold display data storage unit in the process of step S551) is specified. A display mode to be displayed after the active display change effect is executed is set.

  Returning to FIG. 20, subsequent to the change effect setting process in step S322, a reach effect setting process, which will be described later, is executed (step S323). In the reach effect setting process, execution setting of reach effect (for example, reach effect in super reach, reach effect in normal reach, etc.) is performed.

  Specifically, in the reach effect setting process, it is determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” that does not enter the reach state. If it is “non-reach”, the reach effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is other than “non-reach”, the reach effect setting process is ended after setting the reach effect according to the variation pattern.

  Thereafter, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S324). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects any one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special-figure change effect control patterns) corresponding to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command and uses it as the use pattern. set. Further, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (display change effect control patterns) corresponding to the hold display change effect by the change effect setting process in step S322 and uses it as a use pattern. May be set. In the display change effect control pattern, a hold display change effect period, which is a determination target in a variable display mid-setting process (FIG. 22) described later, is also set. In addition, it is not limited to what sets a separate production control pattern as an effect control pattern at the time of special figure change, a display change production control pattern, and a reach production control pattern, 1 production control corresponding to the combination of the execution setting of each production A pattern may be set.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S324, for example, an initial value of an effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command. (Step S325). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step S326). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (special-figure change effect control pattern) determined in the process of step S324 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. For example, the variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5.

  After executing the processing of step S326, in response to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, such as the first hold display in the first hold display portion 5HR and the second hold display in the second hold display portion 5HL, Settings for updating the hold display and the like are performed (step S327). For example, when the special figure game using the first special figure is executed (started), the display part (the leftmost display part) corresponding to the hold number “1” is deleted in the first hold display unit 5HR. (Digestion) and move (shift) the first hold display in the display parts corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” one by one to the left. On the other hand, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed (started), the display part (the display part on the right end) corresponding to the holding number “1” is deleted in the second holding display part 5HL. (Digestion) and move (shift) the second hold display in the display parts corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” one by one in the right direction. Moreover, in the process of step S327, you may perform the setting for updating the active display in the active display part AHA. In this case, for example, when the first hold display corresponding to the hold number “1” is erased (digested) in the first hold display portion 5HR, the same active display as the erased (digested) first hold display is displayed. The active display unit AHA starts. On the other hand, when the second hold display corresponding to the hold number “1” is erased (digested) in the second hold display portion 5HL, an active display similar to the erased (digested) second hold display is actively displayed. Start at part AHA.

  After updating the hold display or the like in the process of step S327, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2” that is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S328), and then the variable display start setting process is performed. finish.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S172 of FIG. 15 as the variable display effect process. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 22, first, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, for example, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (step S341). As an example, in the process of step S341, when the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and an end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, etc. In addition, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S341 (step S341; No), it is determined whether or not it is the hold display change effect period for executing the hold display change effect (step S342). The hold display change effect period may be determined in advance in, for example, the effect control pattern (display change effect control pattern) determined in the process of step S324 shown in FIG. If it is the hold display change effect period (step S342; Yes), control for executing the hold display change effect is performed (step S343). In the process of step S343, various commands created based on the setting of the display change effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on, blinked, or turned off. In other words, it is only necessary that the predetermined display device can execute the hold display change effect by combining some or all of them.

  When it is determined in step S342 that it is not the hold display change effect period (step S342; No), after executing the process of step S343, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S346. In addition, when it is not a holding | maintenance display change production period (step S342; No), after execution of step S343, the determination process whether it is an active display change production period similarly to the process of the above-mentioned step S342 and S343, for example. Alternatively, control for executing the active display change effect may be executed.

  In step S346, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect. The reach production period may be determined in advance, for example, in the production control pattern determined according to the variation pattern. When it is determined in step S346 that it is a reach production period (step S346; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is super reach (step S346A). When it is determined that it is super reach (step S346A; Yes), a hold display erasing process is executed to delete the hold display displayed on the first hold display portion 5HR and the second hold display portion 5HL (step S347). . For example, as shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, the hold display of the second hold display portion 5HL is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 until the start of the super reach production. As shown in FIG. 24C, when the super reach effect is started by executing the hold display erasing process (that is, when the start timing of the super reach effect is reached), the hold display of the second hold display unit 5HL is erased. (If the hold display of 1st hold display part 5HR is displayed, the hold display will also be erased), and the hold display will be hidden. As described above, since the hold display is not displayed during the super reach effect, the predetermined area portion at the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 (that is, the display area portions of the first hold display portion 5HR and the second hold display portion 5HL). Also, it is possible to perform image display by super reach production. Further, the player can watch the super reach effect without worrying about the hold display, and can enjoy the effect. Therefore, the reach effect can be fully exhibited.

  The non-display of the hold display is ended by the hold display return control (step S349B) to be described later when the super reach effect ends. That is, the hold display is restored. In this embodiment, the hold display is not displayed during the super reach effect, but may be hidden during the normal reach effect.

  After the process of step S347 is executed, a temporary display process for temporarily displaying the volume status display image VL is executed when there is a request from the player even during the super reach effect (step S347). That is, when the player operates the stick controller 31A during the super reach production, the volume status display image VL (see FIG. 25D) is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). )Is displayed.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S348 of FIG. 22 as the temporary display process. In the temporary display process shown in FIG. 23, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the non-super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S701). When the non-super-reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S701; Yes), it is determined whether a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation (step S702). If the predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (step S702; No), the presence / absence of a volume changing operation is determined (step S703).

  If there is a volume change operation (step S703; Yes), the changed volume status display (display of the changed volume status display image VL) and the changed volume setting are executed (step S704). In this step S704, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A (for example, operated in the left direction or the right direction), the changed volume state display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control to be displayed is executed, the changed volume setting value is stored in the RAM 122, and the changed volume setting is performed such that the audio control board 13 is controlled so that the changed volume is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. (Step S704).

  On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S702; Yes), a volume status display erasure process for erasing the volume status display image VL displayed on the image display device 5 is executed (step S705). The non-super-reach operation flag is reset to the off state (step S706).

  When the non-super-reach operation flag is off at step S701 (step S701; No), when there is no volume change operation at step S703 (step S703; No), after executing the process of step S704, After executing the process of step S706, it is determined whether or not the super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S707).

  If the super reach operation flag is off in step S707 (step S707; No), it is determined whether or not a volume change operation start is accepted (step S708). If the operation start is accepted in step S708 (step S708; Yes), that is, if the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A, the current sound volume status is displayed on the image display device 5. Display control for displaying the display image VL is executed (step S709). As shown in FIG. 25D, during the super reach effect, the current sound volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the operation of the stick controller 31A. After executing the process of step S709, the super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S710).

  When the super-reach operation flag is ON in step S707 (step S707; Yes), or after executing the process of step S710, it is determined whether a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation (step S707). Step S711). If the predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (step S711; No), it is determined whether or not a volume change operation has been performed (step S712). When there is a volume change operation (step S712; Yes), the display of the changed volume status display image VL and the changed volume setting are executed (step S713). Specifically, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A in the left-right direction (step S712; Yes), the change according to the number of operations of the stick controller 31A in the left-right direction The display control for displaying the subsequent volume status display image VL on the image display device 5 is executed, the changed volume setting value corresponding to the number of operations is stored in the RAM 122, and the changed volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the volume setting after the change is performed such as controlling the sound control board 13 (step S607).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (E), when the player operates the stick controller 31A once in the right direction, the lit state of the image display section is increased by one, and the changed volume state display image VL (fourth level) Are displayed on the image display device 5, and the sound volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased by one level. Contrary to the above, when the player operates the stick controller 31A once in the left direction, the changed volume state display image VL in which the lighting state of the image display section is reduced by one is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, the sound volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R decreases by one level.

  When a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S711; Yes), a process for deleting the volume status display is executed (step S714). For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (F), when a predetermined period elapses after the operation, the display of the volume state display image VL is deleted. That is, the volume status display is not displayed. In this way, during the super reach production, if there is a player's operation, the volume status display image VL is temporarily displayed, and if the predetermined period has elapsed after the operation, the volume status display is still in progress. The image VL is erased.

  After executing the process of step S714, the super-reach operation flag is reset to the off state (step S715). Then, when no operation start is accepted at step S708 (step S708; No), when there is no volume change operation at step S712 (step S712; No), after the processing of step S713 is executed, or after step S715. After executing the process, the temporary display process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 22, when it is determined in step S346A that it is not super reach (step S346A; No), after executing the process of step S348, control for executing other reach effects is performed ( Step S349).

  When it is determined in step S346 that it is not the reach production period (step S346; No), after executing the process of step S349, whether or not it is the hold display return timing (for example, the end timing of the super reach production). Is determined (step S349A). When it is determined in step S349A that it is the hold display return timing (step S349A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes hold display return control for returning the hold display (step S349B). For example, when the hold display return timing (for example, the end timing of the super reach effect) is reached, the hold display is returned as shown in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S349A that it is not the hold display return timing (step S349A; No), after executing the process of step S349B, for example, in the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern Based on this, control is performed to execute other effects during variable display, including decorative variable display operations (step S350), and the variable display effect processing is terminated.

  If the variable display time has elapsed in step S341 (step S341; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S351). At this time, if there is no reception of the symbol confirmation command (step S351; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and waits. If the predetermined time has passed without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may make it do.

  If a symbol confirmation command is received in step S351 (step S351; Yes), for example, in a variable display of decorative symbols such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, for example. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (definite decorative symbol) that is the display result (step S352). At this time, a predetermined time is set as the hit start designation command reception waiting time (step S353). Further, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S354), and then the effect process during variable display is ended.

  Hereinafter, an example of specific control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, after a game ball driven into the game area passes through (enters) the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, a start winning such as the first starting winning or the second starting winning occurs. Based on the establishment of the start condition that permits the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, the variable symbol special symbol display is started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The On the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols is performed in synchronization with variable display of special symbols.

  When the first start condition is established based on the occurrence of the first start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, the processing of steps S203 and S207 shown in FIG. 4 is executed. , 1 is added to the number of first special figure hold memory. When the second start condition is established based on the occurrence of the second start prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the second start prize opening, the processes of steps S206 and S207 shown in FIG. 4 are executed. The second special figure holding storage number is incremented by one. At this time, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted by the process of step S209. In step S212, a winning random number determination process as shown in FIG. 5 is executed to determine variable display contents such as whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. Is received from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  When variable display of a special game or a decorative symbol is started based on the establishment of the start condition, a plurality of variation patterns are obtained by executing variation pattern setting processing as shown in FIG. 9 in step S111 shown in FIG. And a variation pattern designation command indicating that the determined variation pattern can be specified is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  In step S321 shown in FIG. 20, the final stop symbol or the like is determined based on the fluctuation pattern indicated in the fluctuation pattern designation command, and then the process shown in FIG. 21 is executed as the change effect setting process in step S322. Is done. In the change effect setting process, when it is determined in step S552 that it is the hold display change timing, execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed in step S553.

(Example)
Here, with reference to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, the example of the effect in a super reach effect is demonstrated.
FIG. 24 shows an effect example in the case of no volume change operation in the super reach variation display. When variable display (variable display) of decorative symbols is started, reach effect setting processing in step S323 shown in FIG. 20 is executed. In the reach production setting process, for example, it is determined that the reach production in the super reach (any of the super reach A to C as the music-type reach) is executed. In this execution example, description will be made from the time when the decorative symbol variable display state reaches the reach state (reach establishment) as shown in FIG. Further, by the volume status display process shown in FIG. 16, a volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

  After reaching FIG. 24B, the reach effect in the super reach as shown in FIG. 24C is executed. An effect image as shown in FIG. 24C (for example, an image using characters of “super reach”) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the super reach. The player can grasp that the super reach production is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 24C, a variable display of decorative symbols is reduced and displayed at the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. The reduced display of the variable display of the decorative design can be executed by the process of step S350, for example. In addition, the volume state display image VL is deleted from the screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 24C by the volume state display deletion process (step S614) shown in FIG. Moreover, the hold display is deleted as shown in FIG. 24C by the hold display deleting process (step S347) shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, a super reach effect including a battle effect as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 24 (H), when the battle effect result (in this case, for example, the battle defeat result) is displayed, the super reach effect is terminated. For example, the final stop symbol of the reach combination as shown in FIG. Derived and displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24I, the volume status display image VL is displayed by the volume status display process (step S162) shown in FIG. 16, and the hold status is controlled by the hold display control process (step S349B) shown in FIG. The display is restored. As shown in FIG. 24I, the variable display ends when the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24 (I), the volume status display image VL is displayed at a position that does not cover the decorative pattern at the time of the fluctuation stop, so that the final stop symbol of the decorative pattern, that is, the game result can be visually confirmed. The volume can be adjusted while not obstructing.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 26A, the execution timing of the volume status display in the case where the volume change operation is not performed in the super reach variation display shown in FIG. FIG. 26A is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing of the volume status display when there is no volume change operation in the super reach variation display.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, in the super reach variation display, the player has not operated the stick controller 31A at all, so the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A remains at a low level. The volume status display is displayed on the image display device 5 except during the super reach production.

  Further, during the production of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 18A, music corresponding to the reach type is reproduced. For example, when the super reach notification is executed as shown in FIG. 24C, for example, as shown in FIG. Are played sequentially. Then, for example, a special effect sound effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, several seconds) between the effect shown in FIG. 24E and the effect shown in FIG.

  As the effect by the special effect sound, for example, a so-called SE (Sound Effect) effect such as a sound having an echo effect, a repeat sound, a noise sound, a sound having a fade-in / fade-out may be executed. Moreover, you may silence only for the said predetermined period. In addition to the output of the special effect sound, it is preferable that an effect is applied to the moving image that is reproduced during the production by super reach only for the predetermined period. For example, if the video suddenly stops (becomes a still image), the screen is blacked out, or a noise display (such as an analog TV sandstorm display) is used. Good.

  Then, for example, in response to a predetermined operation from the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B being performed during the execution of the special effect sound, or in response to the elapse of a predetermined period, FIG. The battle effect result shown in (H) is displayed, and together with this display, the sound effect for losing to notify the losing is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the case of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 18B, rust is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a continuation of the part of the music that was being played during the super reach performance. In this way, the player's expectation can be enhanced by applying a special effect to the sound and the moving image before the battle effect result (the result of the effect informing whether the game is won or lost) is displayed.

  Note that the control for executing the reach effect with such special effects can be executed in step S349. Further, the period for executing the special effect may be determined in advance for each variation pattern of the music-type reach, for example. In addition, during the production of the music-type reach, the music may not be played from the beginning (intro), but may be played from A melody, B melody, or the like. In addition, when a big hit is made after the production of the music-type reach, it may be reproduced from the continuation of the portion reproduced during the reach production of the music-type reach during the first round. For example, (i) A melody may be played during the reach production, and may be played from the B melody subsequent to the A melody during the first round, or (ii) the halfway through the A melody during the reach production. Then, the music may be played from the continuation of the A melody during the first round.

  Next, a case where a volume change operation is performed in the super reach variation display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 shows an effect example in the case where there is a volume change operation in the super reach variation display. 25A to 25C are the same as FIGS. 24A to 24C described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted. The music playback mode during the super reach production is the same as described above.

  As shown in FIG. 25D, when the stick controller 31A is operated during the super reach effect, the volume state display image VL is displayed. Then, when the player operates the stick controller 31A once in the right direction, as shown in FIG. 25E, the volume state display image VL after the change in which the lighting state of the image display section is increased by one. (Volume status display image VL at the fourth level) is displayed on the image display device 5, and the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R is increased by one level (becomes the fourth level volume output). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation, the volume status display image VL is deleted as shown in FIG.

  Through FIG. 25 (D), as shown in FIG. 25 (H), the battle effect result (in this case, for example, the battle defeat result) is displayed, and the super reach effect ends, and for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (I). The final stop symbol of the reach combination is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 25 (I), since the super reach effect is finished, the changed volume state display image VL is displayed and the hold display is restored.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 25D and 25E, the volume status display image VL in the gaming state (second state) during the super reach effect is other than the super reach effect as shown in FIG. Since the display is the same as the display state of the volume state display image VL in the gaming state (first state), the display of the volume state display image VL in the second state can be easily understood. As described above, the first state and the second state may not be the same. For example, the volume state display image VL in the second state may display [1] a different display from the volume state display image VL in the first state at the same display location as in the first state, or [2] The same display as the volume state display image VL in the first state may be displayed at a different display location from that in the first state, or [3] the first display different from the volume state display image VL in the first state. You may display in the display location different from the case of a state.

  Here, the execution timing of the volume status display in the case where the volume change operation is performed in the super reach variation display shown in FIG. 25 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26B is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing of the volume status display when there is a volume change operation in the super reach variation display.

  As shown in FIG. 26B, during the super reach effect, there is an operation of the stick controller 31A by the player, and this operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A. That is, the controller sensor unit 35 </ b> A detects a detection signal (pulse signal) corresponding to the operation by the player and outputs it to the effect control board 12. In the volume status display, the volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation by the player during the super reach effect.

  Next, the execution timing of the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the start of the super reach effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27A is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing of the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the start of the super reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, the player may operate the stick controller 31A immediately before the start of the super reach effect (for example, within a period from 3 seconds before the start to the start). Also in this case, such an operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A, and the display of the volume state display image VL is started. Then, the super reach production starts within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation, that is, within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of the display of the volume status display image VL. The volume state display image VL is erased halfway at the start timing of the effect. In this embodiment, the volume status display image VL displayed immediately before the start of the super reach effect is extended and displayed by steps S701 to S706 in the temporary display process shown in FIG. (See the extended display shown in FIG. 27A). Thus, even when the display of the volume status display image VL is started immediately before the start of the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is displayed in an extended manner, and the volume status display image VL is displayed halfway at the start timing of the super reach effect. Can be prevented from being erased. In the example shown in FIG. 27A, it is ensured that the volume state display image VL is displayed for a predetermined period (3 seconds) after the operation. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27B, the volume state display image VL may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) from the start timing of the super reach effect.

  Next, the execution timing of the volume status display when there is a volume change operation immediately before the end of the super reach effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27C is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing of the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the end of the super reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 27C, the player may operate the stick controller 31A immediately before the end of the super reach effect (for example, within a period from 3 seconds before the end to the end). Also in this case, such an operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A, and the display of the volume state display image VL is started. Then, the super reach effect ends within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation, that is, within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of display of the volume status display image VL. When the predetermined period has elapsed, the volume state display image VL is once erased and then displayed again. In this embodiment, the volume status display image VL displayed immediately before the end of the super reach effect is obtained from the step S601, step S602, step S604, and step S605 in the volume status display process shown in FIG. Is displayed as it is even after the end of (see “continuation of display” shown in FIG. 27C). Thereby, even when the display of the volume status display image VL is started immediately before the end of the super reach effect, the display of the volume status display image VL is continued, and the volume status display image VL is displayed when a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation. It is possible to omit a useless process of once erasing and displaying again.

(Regarding the production process when the attacker opens)
From here, the attacker opening effect process (step S174) shown in FIG. 15 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect process when the attacker is released. In the attacker opening effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a jackpot end designation command has been received (step S181). At this time, if no jackpot end designation command is received (step S181; NO), the first round to the fourth round in which the number of round games executed in the jackpot gaming state is “1” to “4” is being executed. It is determined whether or not (step S182).

  If it is determined in step S182 that the first to fourth rounds are being executed (step S182; YES), the rendering operation that is the promotion effect during the big hit is controlled (step S183). Thus, in this embodiment, during the execution of the first to fourth rounds in the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot promotion effect as the sixth notification serving as a notification effect as to whether or not to control to the probability variation state is performed. Executed.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is no jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the gaming state becomes a probabilistic state even though the confirmed decoration pattern is a non-probable big hit combination, and there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during jackpot. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the non-probability variable symbol or the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the decorative symbol variable display is performed. May be notified so that the player can recognize the presence or absence of promotion to be in a certain change state by displaying different effect images.

  When it is determined in step S182 that the first to fourth rounds are not being executed (step S182; NO), after executing the process of step S183, notification that a predetermined probability variation control condition has been established is notified. Effect operation control for executing the certainty change confirmation notifying effect for performing is performed (step S184). The effect control CPU 120 is based on variable display contents such as a variable pattern indicated by a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and a variable display result indicated by a variable display result notification command. It may be determined whether or not the probability variation control condition is satisfied. In addition, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a probability change control condition for establishing a probability change state after the big hit game state is satisfied in response to a game ball passing through a specific area of the game board. In this case, a specific area switch is provided in the specific area, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the probability variation control condition is satisfied when the specific area switch detects the passage of the game ball.

(Probability change notification effect operation control process)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S184 of FIG. 28 as the probability change confirmation notification effect operation control process. In the probability change confirmation notification effect operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the probability change confirmation notification effect period based on the effect control pattern, for example (step S801).

  If it is not the probability change confirmation notification effect period in step S801 (step S801; NO), it is determined whether or not a probability change confirmation notification command has been received (step S802). At this time, if the probability change confirmation notification command has not been received (step S802; NO), the probability change confirmation notification effect operation control process is terminated.

  If a probability change confirmation notification command is received in step S802 (step S802; YES), or if it is a probability change confirmation notification production period in step S801 (step S801; YES), error notification is being executed. It is determined whether or not (step S803). At this time, if the error notification is not being executed (step S803; NO), after performing the operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect in the uppermost layer (step S804), the probability change confirmation notification effect operation is performed. The control process ends. For example, in the process of step S804, in order to execute a certain change confirmation notification effect according to a predetermined effect mode according to the effect control execution data read from the effect control pattern prepared in advance to execute the certain change confirmation notification effect. Various commands may be generated and transmitted to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, for example, a probability change confirmation notification effect such as that shown in FIG. 34 (B) is displayed on the uppermost layer.

  It should be noted that step S805 (FIG. 29), steps S818 to S820 (FIG. 30), steps S900 to S902 (FIG. 31), steps S465 to S468 (FIG. 32), and steps S475 to S479 (FIG. 33) related to the rendering operation control described later. ), In the same manner as step S804, various commands are generated and the display control unit 123 is executed in order to execute an effect in a predetermined effect mode according to the effect control execution data read from the effect control pattern prepared in advance. And may be transmitted to the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like.

  The probability change confirmation notification effect image shown in FIG. 34 (B) includes a character image MM2 for notifying a message “probability change!” In response to a predetermined probability change control condition being satisfied. In addition, the display time of the probability change confirmation notification effect image (execution period of the probability change confirmation notification effect) may be, for example, 20 seconds.

  If error notification is being executed in step S803 (step S803; YES), after performing operation control to execute the probability change confirmation notification effect in a layer lower than the layer for which error notification is being executed. (Step S805), the probability change confirmation notification effect operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to “0”, and the Z value of the probability change confirmation notification effect image is set to “1” and registered. As a result, the CPU 120 for effect control performs control to preferentially execute error notification over the probability change confirmation notification effect, such as displaying the probability change confirmation notification effect image on a layer lower than the layer where the error notification image is displayed. Do.

  In step S184 of FIG. 28, after executing such a certainty change confirmation notification effect operation control process, a prize ball number notification effect for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a winning ball during the big hit is executed. Production operation control is performed (step S185).

(Prize ball number notification effect operation control process)
FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S185 of FIG. 28 as the prize ball number notification effect operation control process. In the award ball number notification effect operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the award ball number notification effect period based on the effect control pattern, for example (step S811).

  If it is not the prize ball number notification effect period in step S811 (step S811; NO), the number of prize balls for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit has reached “2000” It is determined whether or not the effect has been executed (step S812). In the process of step S812, for example, a 2000 arrival flag is set that is set to ON when notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a winning ball during a big hit has reached “2000”. The determination may be made based on whether or not the 2000 arrival flag is in the ON state.

  As in step S812, in each process of step S814 (FIG. 30), steps S393, and S395 (FIG. 31) described later, for example, the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball reaches “predetermined”. A arrival flag that is set to the on state when the fact is notified is provided, and the determination may be made based on whether or not the arrival flag is in the on state.

  If the prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in step S812 has reached “2000” has not been executed (step S812; NO), the RAM 122 The prize ball count value stored in the predetermined area is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read value is “2000” or more (step S813). At this time, when the prize ball count value is not “2000” or more (step S813; NO), the prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

  When the prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in step S812 has reached “2000” has been executed (step S812; YES), It is determined whether or not a prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball has reached “2400” has been executed (step S814).

  If the prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in step S814 has reached “2400” has been executed (step S814; YES), The ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

  When the prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in step S814 has reached “2400” has not been executed (step S814; NO), the RAM 122 The prize ball count value stored in the predetermined area is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read value is “2400” or more (step S815). At this time, if the prize ball number count value is not equal to or greater than “2400” (step S815; NO), the prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

  When the prize ball count value is “2000” or more in step S813 (step S813; YES), or when the prize ball count value is “2400” or more in step S815 (step S815; YES). If it is the prize ball number notification effect period in step S811 (step S811; YES), it is determined whether or not the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed (step S816).

  If the probability change confirmation notification effect is not being executed in step S816 (step S816; NO), it is determined whether error notification is being executed (step S817). At this time, if the error notification is not being executed (step S817; NO), after performing the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect in the highest layer (step S818), the number of prize balls is notified. The effect operation control process ends. Thereby, for example, a prize ball number notification effect such as displaying a prize ball number notification effect image as shown in FIG. 34C on the uppermost layer is executed.

  The prize ball number notification effect image shown in FIG. 34C notifies the message “2000 GET” in response to the fact that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit has reached “2000”. It includes a character image MM3 and a character image CA1 in which the message “2000 GET” is emitted as a dialogue. The display time of the prize ball number notification effect image (execution period of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect) may be, for example, 10 seconds.

  When error notification is being executed in step S817 (step S817; YES), operation control for executing a prize ball number notification effect is performed in a layer lower than the layer in which the error notification is being executed. After (step S819), the award ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to “0”, and the Z value of the prize ball number notification effect image is set to “2” and registered. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 preferentially executes the error notification over the prize ball number notification effect such that the prize ball number notification effect image is displayed in a lower layer than the layer where the error notification image is displayed. Take control.

  If the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed in step S816 (step S816; YES), an operation for executing the prize ball number notification effect in a lower layer than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed. After performing the control (step S820), the award ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the probability variation confirmation notification effect image is set to “1”, and the Z value of the winning ball number notification effect image is set to “2” and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 prioritizes the probability change confirmation notification effect over the prize ball number notification effect in which the prize ball number notification effect image is displayed in a lower layer than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed. Control to be executed automatically.

  In FIG. 30, when the process of step S820 is performed, the award ball number notification effect operation control process is ended, but the process of step S817 may be executed following the process of step S820. That is, operation control in a plurality of layers may be performed collectively in one execution of the award ball number notification effect operation control process (step S185). The same applies to other similar operation control processing (for example, cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control processing (step S186) in FIG. 31).

  After executing such a prize ball number notification effect operation control process in step S185 in FIG. 28, the cumulative number of prize balls for notifying the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a winning ball during the big hit in the continuous chain. Effect operation control for executing the notification effect is performed (step S186).

(Cumulative award ball notification effect operation control process)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S186 of FIG. 28 as the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process. In this cumulative award ball number notification effect operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the jackpot promotion effect has ended (step S391). In the process of step S391, for example, a jackpot promotion effect flag that is turned on during execution of the jackpot promotion effect is provided, and determination may be made based on whether or not the jackpot promotion effect flag is on. .

  If the jackpot promotion effect has not ended in step S391 (step S391; NO), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process ends. Thus, in this embodiment, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed until the jackpot promotion effect ends. This is an important effect that the player should pay attention to whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit in the first round to the fourth round in this embodiment is a promotion in which the gaming state becomes a probable state. However, until the end of the promotion effect during the big hit, whether the continuous Chang will continue by executing the cumulative prize-ball notification effect that will improve the effect on the premise that the continuous Chang will continue This is so as not to reduce the degree of attention to the promotion effect during the big hit, which also informs whether or not.

  When the big hit promotion effect is completed in step S391 (step S391; YES), it is determined based on, for example, the effect control pattern whether or not it is the cumulative prize ball number notification effect period (step S392). ).

  If it is not the cumulative prize ball number notification effect period in step S392 (step S392; NO), it is confirmed that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous chain has reached “5000”. It is determined whether or not the cumulative prize ball number notification effect to be notified has been executed (step S393).

  In step S393, when the cumulative prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous game has reached “5000” has not been executed (step S393). S393: NO), the cumulative prize ball count value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is read, and it is determined whether or not the read value is “5000” or more (step S394). At this time, if the cumulative prize ball count value is not equal to or greater than “5000” (step S394; NO), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process ends.

  In step S393, when the cumulative prize-ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the chain has reached “5000” has been executed (step S393). S393; YES), it is determined whether or not the cumulative prize-ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the series has reached “10000” has been executed. (Step S395).

  In step S395, if the cumulative prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the chain has reached “10000” has been executed (step S395). S395; YES), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

  In step S395, when the cumulative prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous game has reached “10000” has not been executed (step S395). S395: NO), the cumulative prize ball count value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is read, and it is determined whether or not the read value is “10000” or more (step S396). At this time, if the cumulative prize ball count value is not equal to or greater than “10000” (step S396; NO), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

  When the cumulative prize ball count value is “5000” or more in step S394 (step S394; YES), or when the cumulative prize ball count value is “10000” or more in step S396 (step S396; YES). In step S392, if it is the cumulative prize ball number notification effect period (step S392; YES), it is determined whether or not the prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S397).

  If the prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S397 (step S397; YES), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. Thus, in this embodiment, when the prize ball number notification effect is being executed, the cumulative prize number notification effect is not executed. This is because the prize ball number notification effect and the cumulative prize ball number notification effect are similar to each other, and when executed simultaneously, the degree of attention to any effect may be reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, the prize ball number notification effect is preferentially executed over the cumulative prize ball number notification effect. Note that a reduction in the degree of attention to any effect may be prevented by preferentially executing the accumulated prize ball number notification effect over the prize ball number notification effect.

  If the prize ball number notification effect is not being executed in step S397 (step S397; NO), it is determined whether the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed (step S398). At this time, if the probability change confirmation notification effect is not being executed (step S398; NO), it is determined whether an error notification is being executed (step S399).

  If the error notification is not being executed in step S399 (step S399; NO), after performing operation control for executing the cumulative prize ball number notification effect in the highest layer (step S900), the cumulative prize The ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. Thereby, for example, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect as shown in FIG. 34D is displayed on the highest layer.

  The cumulative prize ball number notification effect image shown in FIG. 34 (D) corresponds to the fact that the cumulative prize ball number paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous game reaches “5000”. The character image MM4 that reports the message “!” And the character image CA2 that emits the message “5000OVER!” As a dialogue are included. The display time of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image (the execution period of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect) may be, for example, 10 seconds.

  When error notification is being executed in step S399 (step S399; YES), operation control is performed to execute the cumulative prize ball number notification effect in a layer lower than the layer for which error notification is being executed. (Step S901), the accumulated prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to “0”, and the Z value of the cumulative award ball number notification effect image is set to “2” and registered. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control gives priority to the error notification over the cumulative prize ball notification effect such as displaying the cumulative prize ball notification effect image on a layer lower than the layer where the error notification image is displayed. Perform control to be executed.

  When the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed in step S398 (step S398; YES), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is executed in a layer lower than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed. After performing the operation control (step S902), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the probability variation confirmation notification effect image is set to “1”, and the Z value of the cumulative award ball notification effect image is set to “2” and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 causes the cumulative prize ball notification effect image to be displayed in a layer lower than the layer where the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed. The control to execute the process preferentially is performed.

  In step S186 of FIG. 28, after such cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control processing is executed, operation control is performed to execute the continuous-chan number notification for informing the continuous-chan number (step S187).

(Consecutive number of times notification operation control processing)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S187 of FIG. 28 as the continuous channel number notification operation control process. In this continuous number of times notification operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S461). At this time, if the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not being executed (step S461; NO), it is determined whether or not the prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S462).

  If the prize ball number notification effect is not being executed in step S462 (step S462; NO), it is determined whether the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed (step S463). At this time, if the probability change confirmation notification effect is not being executed (step S463; NO), it is determined whether an error notification is being executed (step S464).

  When the error notification is not being executed in step S464 (step S464; NO), after performing the operation control for executing the continuous channel number notification in the highest layer (step S465), the continuous channel number notification is performed. The operation control process ends. Thereby, for example, continuous channel count notification such as that shown in FIG. 34E is displayed on the uppermost layer.

  34E includes a character image MM5 that reports a message “big hit × N (N is the number of consecutive chunks)” corresponding to the number of consecutive chunks. In addition, the notification (display) time of the continuous channel count may be, for example, 5 seconds.

  If error notification is being executed in step S464 (step S464; YES), after performing operation control for executing continuous channel count notification in a layer lower than the layer in which error notification is being executed. (Step S466), the continuous channel number notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to “0” and the Z value of the continuous change number notification image is set to “3” and registered. As a result, the CPU 120 for effect control performs control to preferentially execute error notification over continuous channel number notification, such as displaying a continuous channel number notification image on a layer lower than the layer where the error notification image is displayed. Do.

  When the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed in step S463 (step S463; YES), the operation control for executing the continuous change number notification in a layer lower than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed. (Step S467), the continuous number of times notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the probability change confirmation notification effect image is set to “1”, and the Z value of the continuous change count notification image is set to “3” and registered. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control gives priority to the certain change confirmation notification effect rather than the continuous change number notification, such as displaying the continuous change number notification image on a layer lower than the layer on which the certain change confirmation notification effect image is displayed. Perform control to be executed.

  When the prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S462 (step S462; YES), the continuous number of times notification is executed in a lower layer than the layer where the prize ball number notification effect is being executed. After performing the operation control (step S468), the continuous number of times notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the prize ball number notification effect image is set to “2”, and the Z value of the continuous number of times notification image is set to “3” and registered. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control gives priority to the effect of notifying the number of consecutive balls over the notification of the number of times of consecutive chants, such as displaying the consecutive number of times of informing notification image in a layer lower than the layer where the prize ball number informing effect image is displayed. Control to be executed automatically.

  If the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S461 (step S461; YES), the consecutive number of times notification is executed in a layer lower than the layer where the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed. After performing the operation control for this (step S469), the continuous number of times notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the cumulative award ball number notification effect image is set to “2”, and the Z value of the continuous number of times notification image is set to “3” and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 causes the cumulative number-of-balls notification effect to be displayed rather than the continuous number-of-times notification, such as displaying the continuous number-of-times notification image on a lower layer than the layer on which the cumulative-number-of-balls notification effect image is displayed. The control to execute the process preferentially is performed.

  After executing such a continuous number of times notification operation control process in step S187 of FIG. 28, a big hit middle song name notification operation control process for notifying the song name being played during the big hit is executed (step S188). ).

(Big hit midway song name notification operation control process)
FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S188 of FIG. 28 as the jackpot song name notification operation control process. In the jackpot song name notification operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S471). At this time, if the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not being executed (step S471; NO), it is determined whether or not the prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S472).

  If the prize ball number notification effect is not being executed in step S472 (step S472; NO), it is determined whether the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed (step S473). At this time, if the probability change confirmation notification effect is not being executed (step S473; NO), it is determined whether an error notification is being executed (step S474).

  When error notification is not being executed in step S474 (step S474; NO), after performing operation control for executing the big hit middle song name notification in the highest layer (step S475), the big hit middle song The name notification operation control process is terminated. Thereby, for example, the big hit mid-song name notification such as displaying the big hit mid-song title notification image as shown in FIG. 34F on the uppermost layer is executed.

  The jackpot / medium song name notification shown in FIG. 34 (F) includes a character image MM6 for reporting a message “MUSIC: xxxxxxxx (where xxxxxxxx is a song name)” corresponding to the song name being played during the jackpot. It is out. In addition, the notification (display) time of the music name (execution time of the music name notification during the big hit) may be, for example, 30 seconds.

  When error notification is being executed in step S474 (step S474; YES), operation control is performed to execute song name notification during jackpot in a layer lower than the layer in which error notification is being executed. After (step S476), the big hit medium music name notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to “0”, and the Z value of the jackpot song name notification image is set to “3” and registered. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control preferentially executes the error notification over the jackpot song name notification, such as displaying the jackpot song name notification image on a lower layer than the layer displaying the error notification image. Take control.

  When the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed in step S473 (step S473; YES), an operation for executing the jackpot song name notification in the lower layer than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed. After performing the control (step S477), the big hit mid-music name notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the probability variation confirmation notification effect image is set to “1”, and the Z value of the jackpot music name notification image is set to “3” and registered. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control prioritizes the probability change confirmation notification effect over the big hit song name notification, such as displaying the jackpot song name notification image in a layer lower than the layer where the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed. Control to be executed automatically.

  If the winning ball number notification effect is being executed in step S472 (step S472; YES), the big hit hit song name notification is executed in a layer lower than the layer in which the winning ball number notification effect is being executed. After performing the operation control (step S478), the big hit midway song name notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the winning ball number notification effect image is set to “2”, and the Z value of the jackpot song name notification image is set to “3” and registered. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 displays the winning ball number notification effect rather than the big hit song name notification, such as displaying the big hit number song name notification image on a lower layer than the layer displaying the winning ball number notification effect image. The control to execute the process preferentially is performed.

  When the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S471 (step S471; YES), the jackpot song name notification is executed in a layer lower than the layer in which the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed. After performing the operation control for performing the operation (step S479), the big hit mid-music name notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the cumulative award ball number notification effect image is set to “2”, and the Z value of the jackpot song name notification image is set to “3” and registered. . As a result, the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of cumulative award balls than that of the jackpot music name notification, such as displaying the jackpot music name notification image on a lower layer than the layer on which the cumulative number of balls notification effect image is displayed. Control to preferentially execute the notification effect is performed.

  If a jackpot end designation command is received in step S181 shown in FIG. 28 (step S181; YES), a jackpot end notification effect time is set (step S189). In the process of step S189, for example, one of a plurality of types of jackpot end notification effect time is selected and set corresponding to the jackpot end effect waiting time specified by the jackpot end designation command transmitted from the main board 11. do it. More specifically, the same time as the jackpot end presentation waiting time specified by the jackpot end designation command may be set as the jackpot end notification effect time.

  Subsequent to the process of step S189, a jackpot end notification effect control pattern is set (step S190). In the process of step S190, for example, it corresponds to the control contents of whether or not the probability change state specified by the jackpot end designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the jackpot end notification effect time set in the process of step S189, etc. And what is necessary is just to select and use the pattern used as a usage pattern from the multiple types of jackpot end notification effect control patterns prepared in advance.

  After performing the process of step S190, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” (step S191), and then the effect process at the time of opening the attacker is ended. When the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” and the next timer interruption occurs, the ending effect process (step S175) shown in FIG. 15 is executed.

  FIG. 36 shows an operation for displaying a notification image in the display area of the image display device 5 when the execution periods of the prize ball number notification effect, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect, the continuous number of times notification, and the jackpot song name notification overlap. An example is shown. For example, when the number of winning balls paid out as a winning ball during the big hit reaches “2000”, whether or not it is the execution period of the continuous number of times notification, the song name notification during the big hit, and the cumulative winning ball number notification effect. Regardless of whether or not, in the process of step S818 in the award ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 30, as shown in FIG. 36A, the operation control for executing the award ball number notification effect in the uppermost layer. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous game reaches “5000”, the process after step S397 in the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 31 is executed. Is done. In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in step S397 shown in FIG. 31, the reason is that the prize ball number notification effect is being executed. As shown in 36 (A), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed.

  In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S468 in the continuous channel number notification operation control process of FIG. 32, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, operation control is performed to execute the continuous number of times notification in a lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed.

  Further, in the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S478 in the jackpot song name notification operation control process of FIG. As shown in (), the operation control for performing the jackpot music name notification in the lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed is performed.

  In this way, when the execution periods of the award ball number notification effect, the cumulative award ball number notification effect, the continuous number of times notification, and the jackpot song name notification overlap, as shown in FIG. While the prize ball number notification effect is executed in the layer, the consecutive number of times notification and the jackpot music name notification are executed in the lower layer, while the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed.

  FIG. 37 shows an operation example in which a notification image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 when the execution periods of the probability change confirmation notification effect, the prize ball number notification effect, the continuous number of times notification, and the jackpot song name notification overlap. Show. For example, when a predetermined probability variation control condition is satisfied, the probability variation confirmation notification effect operation control process of FIG. 29 is performed regardless of whether or not it is an execution period of the number of winning balls notification effect, the notification of the number of consecutive chants, and the jackpot song name notification. In the process of step S804 in FIG. 37, as shown in FIG. 37A, the operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect is performed in the uppermost layer.

  On the other hand, when the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit reaches “2000”, the process after step S816 in the prize ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 30 is executed. In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), the probability change confirmation notification effect is executed in the process of step S820. Operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed in a layer lower than the layer.

  In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S468 in the continuous channel number notification operation control process of FIG. 32, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, operation control is performed to execute the continuous number of times notification in a lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed.

  Further, in the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, the processing of step S478 in the jackpot-song music name notification operation control processing of FIG. As shown in (), the operation control for performing the jackpot music name notification in the lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed is performed.

  In this way, when the execution periods of the probability change confirmation notification effect, the prize ball number notification effect, the continuous number of times notification, and the jackpot song name notification overlap, as shown in FIG. The probability change confirmation notification effect is executed, the prize ball number notification effect is executed in a lower layer, and the continuous number of times notification and jackpot music name notification are executed in a lower layer.

  FIG. 38 shows an operation example in which a notification image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 when the execution periods of error notification, prize ball number notification effect, consecutive number of times notification, and jackpot song name notification overlap. Yes. For example, when an act of illegally guiding a game ball to a winning opening using a magnet is detected, whether or not it is an execution period of a prize ball number notification effect, a continuous number of times notification, or a jackpot song name notification. First, in the process of step S143 in FIG. 14, as shown in FIG. 38A, operation control for executing error notification in the uppermost layer is performed.

  On the other hand, when the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit reaches “2000”, the process after step S816 in the prize ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 30 is executed. In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the error notification is performed, in the process of step S819, as shown in FIG. Operation control for executing a prize ball number notification effect is performed in the layer.

  In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S468 in the continuous channel number notification operation control process of FIG. 32, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, operation control is performed to execute the continuous number of times notification in a lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed.

  Further, in the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S478 in the jackpot music name notification operation control process of FIG. As shown in (), the operation control for performing the jackpot music name notification in the lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed is performed.

  As described above, when the execution periods of error notification, prize ball number notification effect, continuous number of times notification, and jackpot song name notification overlap, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), error notification is performed in the highest layer. Is executed, the prize ball number notification effect is executed in the lower layer, and the consecutive number of times notification and the jackpot music name notification are executed in the lower layer.

  FIG. 39 shows an operation example in which a notification image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 when the execution periods of error notification, probability change confirmation notification effect, continuous number of times notification, and jackpot song name notification overlap. . For example, when an act of illegally guiding a game ball to a winning opening using a magnet is detected, regardless of whether or not it is the execution period of the probability change confirmation notification effect, the continuous number of times notification, and the jackpot music name notification In the process of step S143 in FIG. 14, as shown in FIG. 39A, operation control for executing error notification in the uppermost layer is performed.

  On the other hand, when a predetermined probability variation control condition is satisfied, processing in step S803 and subsequent steps in the probability variation confirmation notification effect operation control processing in FIG. 29 is executed. In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the error notification is performed, in the process of step S805, as shown in FIG. Operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect is performed in the layer.

  In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect is performed, in the process of step S467 in the continuous channel number notification operation control process of FIG. 32, FIG. As shown in the drawing, operation control is performed to perform continuous channel number notification in a layer lower than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed.

  Further, in the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect is performed, in the process of step S477 in the jackpot song name notification operation control processing of FIG. 33, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, operation control is performed for executing the jackpot music name notification in a layer lower than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed.

  Thus, when the execution periods of error notification, probability change confirmation notification effect, continuous number of times notification, and jackpot song name notification overlap, as shown in FIG. 39B, error notification is performed in the highest layer. At the same time, a certainty change confirmation notification effect is executed in a lower layer, and a continuous change count notification and a jackpot music name notification are executed in a lower layer.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to include all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and the part described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with the following structure.

  As an example, in the above-described embodiment, for example, an error notification corresponding to a magnetic abnormality notification designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is performed for an act of illegally guiding a game ball to a winning opening using a magnet, for example. Explained as a thing. On the other hand, as abnormalities, in addition to the above-described radio wave abnormalities, vibration abnormalities, radio wave abnormalities, front door opening abnormalities, payout mechanism abnormalities, illegal prize winning abnormalities at the big prize opening, and the lower plate are full. There may be an abnormality and the like may be detected using an abnormality detection sensor group or the like. And about these abnormalities, the priority should just be respectively set with respect to other alerting | reporting similarly to the error alerting | reporting in the said embodiment. In that case, a priority order may be set for each type of abnormality in consideration of the severity.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the prize ball number notification effect was demonstrated as what alert | reports the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit as a specific period. On the other hand, the specific period may be a period other than the big hit such as one round or one minute. With such a configuration, for example, a prize ball number notification effect can be executed at a suitable timing in accordance with a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball passes through a big winning opening.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the cumulative prize ball notification effect has been described as notifying the cumulative number of prize balls that have been paid out as a prize ball during a big hit during a consecutive period as a special period. On the other hand, the special period may be a period other than during continuous chaining, such as one day or one week. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to execute the cumulative prize ball number notification effect at a suitable timing in accordance with the difference in the number of prize balls paid out by passing the game ball through the big prize opening, the difference in the continuous rate, etc. it can.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the probability change confirmation alert | report was demonstrated as an example of the alerting | reporting regarding a state, it is not restricted to this. For example, in a mode in which the player is notified that the game ball is allowed to pass through the specific area (for example, right-handed notification), and the big hit is determined when the game ball has passed the predetermined area, the specific area for the player Notification that game ball is allowed to pass through, Notification that game ball has passed the predetermined area, Notification by probability variation promotion effect, Notification by round number promotion effect, Promotion regarding ST number or short-time number (Increase from the initial notification number) Notification regarding the continuous chain within the hold (confirmation notification of the continuous chain within the hold, notification of the expected degree of the continuous chain within the hold), notification regarding the remaining number of ST times or the number of short times.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the priority order is determined by setting the Z value for each notification image. On the other hand, for the priority of each notification, for example, error notification is executed preferentially over the probability change confirmation notification effect, and error notification is executed preferentially over the winning ball number notification effect, while error notification and probability change are performed. When the confirmation notification effect and the prize ball number notification effect are executed simultaneously, the priority order of each notification is determined according to the combination of notifications executed simultaneously, such as the probability change confirmation notification effect is preferentially executed over the error notification. It may be changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute notification according to a combination of notifications executed simultaneously.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, when the cumulative number of winning balls reaches “5000” or “10000” by winning the final count of the final round, the cumulative winning ball number notification effect is in the ending effect. Will be executed. However, when probability variation control is performed after the end of the ending effect, the cumulative award ball number notification effect is not performed during the fanfare effect when the next big hit occurs without executing the cumulative award ball number notification effect during the ending effect. (I.e., the cumulative prize ball number notification effect may be performed after the next big hit and before the big winning opening is opened). In place of the above, at the start of the first round of the next big hit (even if there is no win in the big prize opening), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect may be performed, or the first round of the next big hit When there is an initial winning, an accumulative number-of-balls notification effect may be performed. With such a configuration, even if the time for the ending effect is short, the cumulative prize-ball number notification effect can be suitably executed.

  Similarly, when the probability variation control is not performed after the ending effect is finished (for example, when only the high opening control is performed), the next big hit is performed without executing the cumulative prize-ball notification effect during the ending effect. During the fanfare production when the event occurs, the cumulative prize ball number notification production may be executed, or at the start of the first round of the next jackpot or when the first prize is received in the first round of the next jackpot In addition, a cumulative prize ball number notification effect may be performed. In addition, when the probability variation control is terminated without generating a big hit next time (for example, when the ST count is terminated), or when the high opening control is terminated, when the probability variation control or the high opening control is terminated, You may make it perform cumulative prize ball number notification effect. When the probability change control is not performed after the end of the ending effect (for example, when neither the probability change control nor the high opening control is performed), the first variable display after the end of the ending effect is performed (the hold is not When there is no ending effect, the accumulated prize ball number notification effect may be executed.

  In the above embodiment, when a so-called over-winning occurs in the final round, a notification effect related to the over-winning may be executed during the ending effect, or the first variable display after the end of the ending effect is displayed. When it is performed (when the ending effect ends when there is no hold), the notification effect related to the overwinning may be executed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the total winning ball number notification effect for notifying the total winning ball number acquired in the big hit gaming state and the short time state in the continuous chain may be executed during the big hit. And also in such embodiment, the priority degree with respect to another alerting | reporting should just be set about the total prize ball number alerting | reporting effect. With such a configuration, even when the total prize ball number notification effect and other notifications are executed simultaneously, each notification can be suitably executed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, regardless of whether or not the jackpot promotion effect is executed, the jackpot promotion effect is completed in the process of step S391 in the cumulative award ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. However, before executing such processing, it is determined whether or not the jackpot promotion effect is executed, and if the jackpot promotion effect is executed, in step S391 On the other hand, in the case where the process of executing the process is not executed, the process after step S392 may be executed without executing the process of step S391. With such a configuration, even when the jackpot promotion effect is not executed, the cumulative prize-ball number notification effect can be executed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is executed when the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous game reaches “5000” and “10000”. Explained. On the other hand, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect has a larger number of prize balls than “10000” such as “5000”, “10000”, “20000”, “30000”,. It may also be executed when the is acquired. With such a configuration, attention to the cumulative prize ball number notification effect can be continued.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when the prize ball number alerting | reporting effect is being performed, it demonstrated that the cumulative prize ball number alerting effect is not performed. On the other hand, even if the prize ball number notification effect is executed, the prize ball number notification effect is executed, for example, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is executed in a period before and after the prize ball number notification effect is executed. And the execution periods of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect may not overlap. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute both the award ball number notification effect and the cumulative prize ball number notification effect.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the volume status display image VL indicating the adjustment status of the volume adjustment is displayed. However, in addition to the volume status display image VL, the display screen of the image display device 5 and the like A luminance status display image indicating the adjustment status of the luminance adjustment may be displayed. Alternatively, only the luminance status display image may be displayed instead of the volume status display image VL. For example, the sound volume status display process (step S162) shown in FIG. 16 and the temporary display process (step S348) shown in FIG. . Further, instead of the volume status display image VL, for example, a mode status display image indicating a mode status which is the execution frequency of the hold change notice may be displayed. Further, the mode status display image may be displayed together with at least one of the volume status display image VL and the luminance status display image.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24C, the volume status display image VL is erased and cannot be viewed, but the volume status display image VL may be displayed in a form that is difficult to view. Good. For example, the volume status display image VL may be displayed in a semi-transparent display mode, or may be displayed in a very small reduced display mode (micro display mode). Moreover, you may make it alert | report that a sound volume adjustment is always possible. For example, you may make it alert | report by the telop display in a variable display effect that volume adjustment is always possible. Moreover, you may make it alert | report by the description effect display in a variable display effect that volume adjustment is always possible. The execution of the telop display and the explanation effect display is not limited to the variable display, but may be possible in a customer waiting state (so-called customer waiting), a big hit gaming state, or the like.

  In the above embodiment, during the super reach production, unless requested by the player, the volume status display image VL is not displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. However, in the big hit gaming state, the volume status display image VL may not be displayed unless requested by the player. In this case, the volume status display process shown in FIG. 16 and the temporary display process shown in FIG. 23 may be modified so as to be executed during the big hit. For example, instead of determining whether or not the super reach effect is being produced in the volume status display process, determining whether or not the big hit effect is being executed, or changing each operation flag to an operation flag in accordance with the big hit time, etc. Thus, the volume status display process can be executed during the big hit. The same applies to the temporary display process. Further, the temporary display process may be modified as a process included in the attacker opening effect process shown in FIG. For example, the temporary display process may be modified as a process executed between any of steps S184 to S188, or immediately before and after. In addition, when performing an ending effect display, you may make it display the volume condition display image VL on the image display apparatus 5 also about an ending effect period. According to such a modified example, the volume status display image VL is displayed in response to the player's request while suppressing a decrease in the effect of a specific effect (for example, a round effect during a big hit, a blessing effect during a big hit). It is possible to display (display the adjustment status of effect adjustment), and to improve the fun of the game.

  Further, the detection control based on the music selection during the big hit may be prioritized over the adjustment status detection control. That is, during the music selection, it is possible that production adjustment (for example, status display such as volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, mode switching, etc.) is impossible. In particular, this is effective when an operation for music selection and an operation for production adjustment are performed by the same operation means (for example, a cross button).

  In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is described, but it may be applied to a slot machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, the first state is, for example, a gaming state other than a super reach effect or a state waiting for a customer and not displaying an error, and a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect) Etc.) is executed in a second state (for example, a gaming state during a super reach effect), but is not limited to this. For example, in a slot machine, the first state is a gaming state other than a continuous production performed between a plurality of games or a state of waiting for a customer and not displaying an error. Etc.) may be set to a second state (for example, a gaming state during a continuous production).

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 may have a special effect such as a congratulatory effect (character introduction), a promotion effect, a V prize notification, etc. in the pachinko machine 1, and an AT notification (assist time notification), an ART notification (assist) in the slot machine. Replay time notification), jackpot 1G continuous notification (single game continuous notification), continuous jackpot notification, and the like may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, the “ratio” and “probability” at which various decisions are made may be 0% (not decided) or 100% (not necessarily decided), such as 70:30, for example. So that the possibility of at least one of the determination results is 0% (not determined) or 100% (always determined) It may be set. For example, in the case of making various decisions, the ratio of the determination result of any one of the plurality of determination results is higher than the ratio of the determination result of other determination results. It may be included to be 100%, or it may be included that the ratio of other determination results is 0%. When the ratio of the determination result of 1 is 100%, the ratio of the other determination result is 0%. Further, when the ratio as the other determination result is 0%, if the ratio as the determination result of 1 is a predetermined ratio other than 100% and not 0%, the ratio as the determination result of 1 is the other determination result. It will be higher than the ratio.

  Further, the special symbols and decorative symbols are not limited to those variably displayed as a plurality of types of identification information. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured using a plurality of LEDs, and only a specific (single) LED among the plurality of LEDs is displayed during variable display of the special symbol. Is repeatedly turned on and off, and the other LEDs are kept off. And when the variable display result is “losing”, the LED that has been repeatedly turned on and off emits light (lights) in a predetermined emission color, or maintains the light off state, Stop displaying special symbols. At this time, the other LEDs remain off. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the special symbol is stopped and displayed by a predetermined lighting pattern in which some or all of the LEDs are turned on. In this way, during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, a specific (single) symbol is switched between display and non-display, while other symbols are maintained in a non-display state. Good. Then, any of a plurality of types of symbols may be derived and displayed (stop display) as a final stop symbol (determined special symbol or definite ornament symbol) resulting in a variable display result of the special symbol or ornament symbol. Further, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured by using a 7-segment LED, and during the variable display of the special symbol, a symbol indicating “−” (lighting) is displayed. It may be configured such that other numbers and symbols are not displayed by repeating the non-display (off). As a special symbol variable display result, a symbol indicating “−” is not stopped and displayed as a predetermined lighting pattern including numbers indicating “1” to “9” and other symbols. The special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this way, during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, as a variable display result, symbols that are not stopped are switched between display and non-display, while other symbols are maintained in a non-display state. May be.

  In the above embodiment, one change pattern designation command is transmitted when variable display is started in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the change pattern indicating the variable display time, the variable display mode of the decorative design, and the like. Although an example is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the side of the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first command before reaching reach, such as the presence or absence of quasi-continuous fluctuation (if it does not reach, the so-called second (2) Before the stop, send a command indicating the variable display time and variable display mode, and after the second command has reached reach, such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if not reach) A command indicating a variable display time or a variable display mode after the so-called second stop may be transmitted. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform effect control in variable display based on a variable display time derived from a combination of two commands. In the game control microcomputer 100, the variable display time is notified by each of the two commands, and a specific variable display mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control CPU 120. It may be. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, or after the first command is sent, after a predetermined period of time elapses (for example, in the next timer interrupt) ) A second command may be transmitted. The variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern using two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the pre-reading determination is performed on the main side and the command corresponding to the determination result is transmitted to the sub-side, but the command indicating the random value is transmitted from the main side and the pre-reading determination is performed on the sub-side. You may make it do.

  In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the light emitter unit, game effect lamp, and decoration LED are also included. Various rendering operations and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

  In the above embodiment, the jackpot type determined in the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8 includes “probability variation”, and the probability variation control condition is determined based on the determination result of the jackpot type being “probability variation”. It has been explained that it is established and is controlled to a probable change state after the big hit gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball that has won (entered) a big winning opening (second large winning opening) in the probability changing attacker provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area has been detected by the probability changing detection switch. Based on the above, the probability variation control condition may be established, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state may be controlled to the certain probability variation state. The winning prize opening (second winning prize opening) of the probability variation attacker can change from a closed state to an open state when the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state is a predetermined number of times (for example, “15”). When the number of times of execution of the game is other than the predetermined number, it may not be possible to change to the open state in the closed state. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can establish the probability variation control condition based on the fact that the game ball has passed the specific area in the attacker that is an example of the special variable winning device provided in the game area. You may be comprised so that it may become.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine. Instead of this, a form distributed by preinstalling in a storage device such as a computer device may be adopted. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

(1-1) The gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) described above includes music reproduction means that is realized by the production control CPU 120 in cooperation with the audio control board 13 and the like. In addition, the gaming machine is configured to be able to select a piece of music to be played in a specific period (for example, a period in a big hit gaming state) from a plurality of types of music (for example, music A to F shown in FIG. 18C). Has been. The music playback means can play back the music during a specific period (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes step S634 in FIG. 17). A specific part different from the beginning of the music is reproduced (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S628 of FIG. 17). According to such a structure, the production effect at the time of music selection can be improved.

The jackpot period in the jackpot gaming state is a period in which the attacker is repeatedly released, that is, a round gaming period, but is not limited thereto. For example, the jackpot period includes a fanfare effect period that is executed at the start of the jackpot game state, a period in which the attacker opens repeatedly (round game period), and a ending effect period that is executed at the end of the jackpot game state. It is good also as a period. The fanfare effect is an effect that is executed at the start of the big hit gaming state and notifies that the big hit gaming state has been entered. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state, which is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state.
Further, the specific period is not limited to the period in the big hit gaming state, and how to determine the period is arbitrary. For example, the specific period may be a super reach production period. In this case, the music determination process shown in FIG. 17 is transformed into a process for determining a music before or during the super reach period, and the determined music is transformed into the process of the transformation or the reach effect control in step S349. What is necessary is just to reproduce | regenerate in a process etc. Further, the specific period may be a probable change state, a short time state, or the like.
Further, the specifying unit is not limited to the “rust” of the music as described above. Depending on the music, a part other than “rust” (A melody, etc.) may be used as the specific part. Moreover, the specific part may be the head part of the music. That is, the data used as the specific unit may be different depending on the music.

(1-2) In addition, in the gaming machine described above, there are a plurality of music determination methods at the time of music selection (for example, when a predetermined music determination operation is performed, or the grand prize opening is closed in the first round) Then, the selected music is determined in step S631 in FIG. 17). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the production effect at the time of music selection.

  Note that there may be a plurality of music determination methods by using a plurality of music determination operations. For example, there may be a plurality of configurations capable of detecting the operation content according to the operation by the player using a non-contact sensor such as the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or an infrared sensor. Further, not only the example in which the selected music piece is determined when the grand prize opening is closed in the first round, but the music piece is determined according to the closing of the big winning opening in any round other than the first round. The music may be determined according to the end of the first hit or the music may be determined. Further, there may be only one music determination method.

(1-3) Further, in the gaming machine described above, music can be selected in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, during execution of the first round in the big hit gaming state). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the production effect at the time of music selection.

  Note that the advantageous state may be during execution of a round other than the first round. Further, the advantageous state is not limited to the big hit gaming state. For example, a special game state such as a probability change state may be an advantageous state, and the first round number in which the upper limit number of rounds that can be executed among a plurality of big hit game states is greater than the second round number (for example, “7”). The big hit gaming state (for example, “15”) may be an advantageous state. Alternatively, the time-short state in which the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed among the plurality of time-short states is a first number (for example, “100”) greater than the second number (for example, “50”) may be an advantageous state. The probability variation state in which the big hit probability is a first probability (for example, 1/20) higher than the second probability (for example, 1/20) among the plurality of probability variation states may be set as the advantageous state. Any other game state that is advantageous to the player may be used. Further, it may be possible to select a music other than in an advantageous state.

(2) In addition, the gaming machine described above is a display means (for example, FIG. 19 (FIG. 19)) that displays an image corresponding to a music played during a specific period and corresponding to a specific part when selecting a music. B) is provided with an image display device 5 or the like that displays a music-corresponding image in the display area VA1. According to such a structure, the production effect at the time of music selection can be improved.

  Note that the image (music-corresponding image) corresponding to the specifying unit may be a moving image or a still image as described above. Further, the music-corresponding image may not be displayed when the music is selected.

(3) In addition, the gaming machine described above stores one piece of music as a plurality of divided voice data including specific part data indicating the voice of the specific part (for example, in the storage unit (for example, FIG. 19A). As shown, a plurality of audio data including chorus data such as ROM 121 is stored,
The music reproducing means reproduces the specific part of one music based on the specific part data at the time of selecting the music (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S628 of FIG. 17), and a plurality of music in the specific period. The piece of music data is connected to reproduce one piece of music (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S634 in FIG. 17). According to such a configuration, the burden of data capacity can be reduced.

  As described above, the music-corresponding image data may also be stored in the ROM 121 or the like in a mode (each as separate image data) divided for each part of the music, like the audio data of the music. In this way, the burden of data capacity can be further reduced. Further, both the audio data indicating one piece of music and the image data corresponding to the piece of music may not be stored in a plurality of divided forms.

(4) Also, according to the gaming machine described above (pachinko gaming machine 1), as shown in FIG. 27A, in the gaming state (first state) other than during the super reach production, the player's stick Regardless of whether or not the controller 31A is operated (player's action), the volume status display image VL (volume adjustment status) is displayed on the image display device 5 so as to be visible. The display image VL can always be visually recognized. Further, in the game state (second state) during the super reach effect in which the super reach effect (specific effect) is executed, the volume status display image VL is made invisible and the player operates the stick controller 31A. Displays the volume status display image VL based on the player's operation of the stick controller 31A until a predetermined period elapses after the operation (until a predetermined condition is satisfied). That is, in the gaming state during the super reach effect, the display of the volume status display image VL can be minimized. Thereby, the volume state display image VL can be displayed according to the player's request while suppressing the reduction in the effect of the super reach effect (specific effect), and the fun of the game can be improved.

  The specific effect is an effect (for example, a super reach effect) that suggests that the player is in an advantageous state. For this reason, while suppressing the fall of the production effect about a super reach production, the volume condition display image VL can be displayed according to a player's request, and the interest property of a game can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 28 (I) and 29 (I), the volume status display image VL is displayed at a position that does not cover the decorative pattern at the time of the fluctuation stop, so that the final stopped pattern of the decorative pattern, that is, The sound volume can be adjusted while not obstructing the visual recognition of the game result.

  In the game state (second state) during the super reach effect, the volume state display image VL is displayed for a predetermined period (or a predetermined period from the start of display of the volume state display image VL) from the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A by the player. Since it is displayed, the display of the volume status display image VL can be minimized. Thereby, the volume state display image VL can be displayed according to the player's request while suppressing the reduction in the effect of the super reach effect (specific effect), and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In the above description, the first state is a gaming state other than during the super reach effect, but the period before the super reach effect is executed (before the start) or after the super reach effect is executed (after the end). It is good also as either state. In addition, the first state may be at least one of a period before the execution of the super reach effect in one change (before the start) or a period after the execution of the super reach effect in one change (after the end). In addition, the second state may be a state of a period for executing the super reach effect in one change. Further, the second state may be a special state that tends to be an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state. This special state is a probability change state or a short time state. Further, the special state is a state in which the game ball is not frequently won (or may be passed or entered) in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and is frequently changed from the first mode to the second mode that is easy to win. There may be.

  Further, according to the player's operation of the stick controller 31A (player's action) before shifting from the gaming state (first state) other than during the super reach effect to the game state (second state) during the super reach effect. When the display of the volume state display image VL for volume adjustment (effect adjustment) is started and the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the state is shifted from the first state to the second state, that is, the super reach effect is being performed, but a predetermined period after the operation. If (3 seconds) has not elapsed, the display of the volume status display image VL is extended until a predetermined period has elapsed since the detection or transition of the player's motion (see FIGS. 31A and 31B). Therefore, the display of the volume status display image VL can be extended and displayed for a predetermined period even after the super reach effect is being produced. That is, it is possible to prevent the volume status display image VL for volume adjustment started just before the start of the super reach production from being terminated halfway at the start timing of the super reach production, and the display of the volume status display image VL is erased midway. You can prevent the uncomfortable feeling of being done. Moreover, it is not necessary for the player to operate the stick controller 31A again immediately after the start of the super reach effect, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided.

  Contrary to the above, the player's operation of the stick controller 31A (the player's operation) before the transition from the gaming state (second state) during the super reach effect to the gaming state (first state) other than during the super reach effect. Display of the volume status display image VL for volume adjustment (effect adjustment) is started according to the operation), and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the state transitions from the second state to the first state, that is, the super reach effect ends. When the game state other than the super reach effect is entered but the predetermined period (3 seconds) has not elapsed since the operation, the display of the volume status display image VL is continued even after the transition to the first state. A process of deleting the display of the volume status display image VL when the period has elapsed can be eliminated. In other words, since the volume status display image VL is always displayed in the first state, it is possible to omit a useless process of erasing the volume status display image VL once when a predetermined period has elapsed and starting display again. In addition, it is possible to prevent an uncomfortable feeling that the display of the volume state display image VL disappears for a moment at the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed.

(5) The gaming machine described above is a notification effect executing means for executing a notification effect (for example, a prize ball number notification effect, a winning number notification effect, a cumulative prize number notification effect, a cumulative winning number notification effect, a probability change confirmation notification effect). For example, a CPU 120 for effect control for executing a promotion effect during the jackpot promotion, etc.). Then, the notification effect executing means is a first notification effect for notifying the magnitude of the value acquired in the specific period as the notification effect (for example, the number of prize balls for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a winning ball during the big hit) Effect) and a second notification effect for notifying the magnitude of the value acquired during the special period (for example, a prize ball number notification effect for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during a big hit in consecutive Chang) The first notification effect and the second notification effect have different priorities (for example, in the process of step S397 in the cumulative award ball number notification effect operation control process in FIG. If it is being executed, the cumulative prize number notifying effect is not executed). According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

The notification effect executing means can execute a third notification for notifying that a special game state (for example, a probable change state) is set as the notification effect, and the priority of the third notification is higher than the first notification. (For example, when the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed in step S216 in the prize ball number notification effect operation control process shown in FIG. 30, the layer lower than the layer in which the probability change notification notification effect is being executed in step S220. For example, performing a motion control for executing a prize ball number notification effect in a layer).
In addition, the notification effect execution means can execute a fourth notification (for example, a notification of the number of consecutive chunks for notifying the number of consecutive chunks) for notifying the number of times that the advantageous state has been controlled during the special period as the notification effect. The priority level of the first notification is higher than the notification (for example, when the award ball number notification effect is being executed in step S462 in the continuous channel number notification operation control process in FIG. 32, the prize ball number notification is performed in step S468. For example, performing operation control for executing the continuous number of times notification in a layer lower than the layer in which the production is performed).
In addition, the notification effect executing means is a fifth notification for notifying information related to other effects executed in a specific period as the notification effect (for example, a jackpot song name notification for notifying a song name being played during the jackpot). Can be executed, and the priority of the first notification is higher than the fifth notification (for example, when the winning ball number notification effect is being executed in step S472 in the jackpot song name notification operation control process in FIG. 33). According to any of these configurations, the operation control for executing the jackpot music name notification in the lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed in step S478) Notification can be executed.

In addition, the notification effect execution means is a sixth notification that notifies whether or not a special value is given in a specific period as the notification effect (for example, a jackpot promotion effect that becomes a notification effect of whether or not to control to a probable change state or the like) ) Can be executed, and the execution of the second notification may be limited until the sixth notification is executed (for example, in step S391 in the cumulative award ball number notification effect operation control process shown in FIG. If is not completed, the cumulative prize number notifying effect is not executed). In such a configuration, it is possible to execute notification in accordance with the production situation.
In addition, at least one of various notifications may be executable during a period (for example, during continuous change) from when the advantageous state is controlled to when the normal state is controlled. In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the period from the control to the advantageous state to the control to the normal state.

In addition, the layer allocated to each of 1st alerting | reporting-6th alerting | reporting is arbitrary. Different layers may be assigned for each notification, and among various notifications, there may be a plurality of notifications to which a common layer is assigned.
In addition, an arbitrary layer may be assigned for the notification of the name of the selected music and the notification regarding the volume status display (for example, any Z value of 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 35A is being selected). Assigned to notifications of music names and notifications related to volume status display). Also, for example, for the display layer of image data (image showing a song name or music-corresponding image data such as PV) at the time of music selection shown in FIG. 19B, the Z value is 3 or 2 and 3 Or between 1 and 2. Moreover, the layer of the image at the time of the music selection shown in FIG. 19B and the image after the music determination shown in FIG. 19C may be changed (the Z value assigned to each may be changed). . That is, the priority order of image display related to music may be different before and after the music is determined.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later. For example, the present invention does not have to include all the components of the gaming machine described in (1-1) to (1-3) and (2) to (5) above, and can achieve the object. If possible, deletion or addition of components is optional.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown in the below-mentioned embodiment.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the descriptions below, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  As other gaming machines of the present invention, there are other gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) that can be displayed in a variable manner and can be controlled in an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. The period display means for displaying the period display (timer display in the second area 9092 in FIG. 55) (the microcomputer 90100 for effect control, the effect display device 909 in FIG. 55, the second area 9092, the timer in S90802 in FIG. 53). When the period display is in a predetermined mode (such as when the timer display is 0 second in the second area 9092 in FIG. 55), the predetermined effect (super reach effect, etc.) is executed. Possible predetermined effect execution means (microcomputer 90100 for effect control, processing for executing super reach effect in S90802 in FIG. 53, etc.), In the display area (second display area 92 in FIG. 55), specific display means (production control microcomputer) capable of displaying a specific display other than the period display (specific display such as “?” Shown in FIG. 59). 55, such as the effect display device 909 of FIG. 55 and the process of executing the specific display in S90802 of FIG. 53) and the music playback means (for example, FIG. The CPU 120 for effect control that executes step S634) can be selected from a plurality of types of music (for example, music A to F shown in FIG. 18C) for the specific period. The music playback means plays back a specific part that is a part of the currently selected music and is different from the head of the music at the time of music selection (for example, performance). Control CPU120 and executing step S628 in FIG. 17) the gaming machine and the like.

  According to the above gaming machine, it is possible to improve the production effect at the time of music selection. Further, it can be noted whether the period display is displayed or the specific display is displayed, and the interest of the game can be improved in the process before the period display is executed.

  In the gaming machine, a music selection effect that prompts the player to select music may be executed as a predetermined effect that is executed when the period display is in a predetermined mode. According to such a configuration, the interest of the predetermined effect can be improved.

  In the above gaming machine, the music piece may be selected during the period in which the period display means displays the period. Furthermore, an effect in which the selected music is played may be executed as the predetermined effect executed when the period display is in a predetermined mode. Even in the case of such a configuration, a specific part different from the beginning of the music is played back when the music is selected, so that the music can be suitably selected even when the period display period is short.

  In the above gaming machine, in the display area of the period display, a display related to music may be performed as a specific display other than the period display. The display related to the music may be, for example, a selection screen display for music selection, or may be a display (song name, lyrics, etc.) showing the music being played if the music is being played. According to such a configuration, the display area of the period display can be effectively used, and the interest of the game can be improved in the process before the period display is executed.

  Furthermore, as an example of the form of the gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game for the process before the period display is performed, the display can be changed to an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. It is a gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 901), and period display means for displaying a period display (timer display in the second area 9092 in FIG. 55) (production control microcomputer 90100, effect display device 909 in FIG. 2 area 9092, a process of executing a timer effect in S90802 in FIG. 53) and when the period display is in a predetermined mode (such as when the timer display is 0 seconds in the second area 9092 in FIG. 55). Predetermined effect execution means (microcomputer for effect control 90100, which can execute a specified effect (super reach effect, etc.), A process of executing a par reach effect) and a specific display other than the period display (specific display such as “?” Shown in FIG. 59) in the display area of the period display (second display area 92 in FIG. 55). There may be a gaming machine provided with displayable specific display means (production control microcomputer 90100 or the like, effect display device 909 in FIG. 55, processing for executing specific display in S90802 in FIG. 53). Below, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the gaming machine is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine and may be another gaming machine such as a coin gaming machine or a slot machine, or a gaming machine capable of playing a game. Any game machine may be used.

[First other embodiment]
First, an overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 40 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 viewed from the front. FIG. 41 is a hit type table.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 is a gaming machine in which a game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area 907. The pachinko gaming machine 901 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape that is provided on the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. And the board 906). In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area.

  A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 903 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 902. Under the hitting ball supply tray 903, an extra ball receiving tray 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 903, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 905 for emitting the hitting ball, and the like are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 906 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 907 is formed on the front surface of the game board 906 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 904 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position (for example, the central portion of the lower tray) on the upper surface of the lower tray body, for example, A stick controller 90122 that can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right) is attached. Note that the stick controller 90122 is provided with a predetermined operation finger by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 90122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 90125 (see FIG. 42) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 90121 (FIG. 42) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like on the trigger button 90125 is provided inside an operation rod of the stick controller 90122. Built-in). In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit 90123 (see FIG. 42) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower pan main body or the like below the stick controller 90122. The stick controller 90122 incorporates a vibrator motor 90126 (see FIG. 42) for causing the stick controller 90122 to vibrate.

  A member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 903 is, for example, a player performing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 90122). A possible push button 90120 is provided. The push button 90120 only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 90124 (see FIG. 42) for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 90120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 90120 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 40, the attachment positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 as the position approached to either the left or right in the upper plate and the lower plate, while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment position of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 is not in the vertical relationship, but may be in the horizontal relationship, for example. As operation means, other operation means such as a lever switch and a jog dial may be provided.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 907, an effect display device 909 is provided as a first display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. On the right side of the effect display device 909 in the game area 907, a first special symbol display (first variation display unit) 908a that variably displays a first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified respectively, A second special symbol display (second variation display unit) 908b that variably displays a second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them is provided.

  Each of the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b is configured by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of displaying numbers and characters in a variable manner. The effect display device 909 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and an effect symbol display area is provided on the display screen for effect display variation display in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is done. In the effect symbol display area, a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols for left, middle, and right is formed.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 908a and the second special symbol indicator 908b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 908a and 908b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  Each of the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on the main board (game control board). The effect display device 909 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display device 908a, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 909 along with the variation display, and the second special symbol display device 908b performs the first display. 2 When the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 909 along with the variation display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  More specifically, in the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variation display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has a first start winning opening 9013). Or after passing through the second start winning opening 9014 (including winning), the start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of reserved storage is not 0 and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed) The display is not executed, and the big hit game is not executed) is started, and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. To do. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  When the jackpot display result (big jackpot symbol) as the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, or the jackpot display result (jackpot symbol) as the specific display result is displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. When the derived display is performed, the effect display device 909 also displays the jackpot display result (combination of jackpot symbol) as the specific display result. When the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display in this manner, the specific game state (big hit game state) is controlled as an advantageous state to which a value (advantageous value) advantageous to the player is given.

  Further, in the effect display device 909, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have been continuously provided for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) In the state where it is in agreement with the combination of symbols), it is stopped, rocking, enlarged, reduced, or deformed, or multiple symbols are displayed synchronously in the same symbol, or the positions of the symbols are switched An effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit is continued before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 909 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the variation display of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed is continued. This is a display state or a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are variably displayed synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, reach means a state in which identification information forms a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable display areas are in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design, etc.)) or a display mode (for example, a color, etc.) of the background image of the effect display device 909 is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is likely to occur compared to a normal reach. Such a special reach is called super reach.

  Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first start winning port 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back of the game board 906 and detected by the first start opening switch 9013a.

  A variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning port 9014 capable of winning a game ball is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 9013. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 9014 is guided to the back of the game board 906 and detected by the second start opening switch 9014a. The variable winning ball device 9015 is opened by a solenoid 9016. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 9014 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In a state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, it is easier for a game ball to win the second start winning port 9014 than the first starting winning port 9013. Further, in a state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning port 9014. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 9013 than the second starting winning port 9014. Note that in a state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that although it is difficult to win, it is possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win). Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 9013 and the second start winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  Above the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the second reserved storage number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 9018b increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, further above the second special symbol storage memory display 9018b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 9013, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 9018a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 9018a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating a ball striking operation handle 905 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 907. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 907 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends the game area 907. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 9013 and is detected by the first start port switch 9013a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display unit 908a starts the variation display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts the variation display of the effect symbol. That is, the change display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 9013. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 9014 and is detected by the second start port switch 9014a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display unit 908b starts the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts the variation display of the effect symbol. That is, the change display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 9014. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 909 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 908a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 908b. The effect symbol as a symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the effect display device 909 causes the jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, at a lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 909, a hold storage display unit (total hold storage display unit) that displays the total number of the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number (total hold memory number). , A hold display area, not shown). In the combined hold storage display unit, the hold storage number can be specified as the hold storage display by, for example, the number of display of the predetermined image, by displaying the hold storage image (one hold storage image corresponding to each hold storage information, Is specified). In this way, by providing the summation pending storage display unit that displays the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. In each of the first special symbol on-hold storage display 9018a, the second special symbol on-hold storage display 9018b, and the effect display device 909, the light emission display and the image display for indicating the number of on-hold storage are on hold display or on hold. Called memory display.

  As shown in FIG. 40, a special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided below the variable winning ball device 9015. The special variable winning ball device 9020 includes an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, and a specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be opened by the solenoid 9021 in the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when is displayed and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball that has won a big winning opening is detected by a count switch 9023.

  In the big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state in which the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened is called a round. Thus, the repeated continuation control is also called round control. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, and when it is determined to be a jackpot, one of the jackpot types is selected.

  On the left side of the effect display device 909, there is provided a normal symbol display 9010 for variably displaying normal symbols that can be distinguished from each other. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 9010 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 9010 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. The small display is formed in a square shape, for example.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the display change of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 9015 is closed in a disadvantageous state for a player for a predetermined number of times. To an open state advantageous to the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time there is a game ball passing through the gate 9032, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol holding storage display 9041 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  At the bottom of the game board 906, there is an out port 9026 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. Also, four speakers 9027 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper and lower left and outer sides of the game area 907. A frame LED 9028 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 907.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter also simply referred to as “card unit”) that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 901 (not shown).

  In the hit type table of FIG. 41, for each hit type in the big hit, the big hit probability after the end of the big hit gaming state, the base after the end of the big hit gaming state, the fluctuation time after the end of the big hit gaming state, the number of releases in the big hit ( The number of rounds) and the opening time of each round are shown.

  Specifically, in the big hit gaming state, after the special variable winning ball device 9020 is in the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or When the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated, the closed state is established. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of releases in the big hit gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

  Among the “big hits”, after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, the probability change state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit is higher than the normal state (the normal gaming state that is not the probability change state) as the special gaming state. The type (type) of jackpot that shifts to (an abbreviation for probability variation state, also referred to as high probability state) is called “probability jackpot”. In this embodiment, the special game state is controlled to a time-short state in which the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the production symbol is shortened from the non-time-short state in association with the probability variation state. There is. Note that the special gaming state may be controlled to the short time state independently of the probability variation state.

  In this way, the transition time to the short-time state reduces the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol. Therefore, when the short-time state is reached, it is easy for an effective start winning to occur, and a big hit game may be performed. Rise. Note that the type of jackpot (type) that does not shift to the probability change state after being controlled to the 15-round jackpot gaming state among the “hits” is called “ordinary jackpot”.

  Further, as the special game state, the frequency of entering the variable winning ball device 9015 is increased by increasing the frequency that the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened in association with the probability changing state or the short time state. In some cases, the control is set to an electric chew support control state that facilitates winning (increasing the frequency and increasing the frequency) in the variable winning ball apparatus 9015. Since the electric chew support control state is a high base state as will be described later, in the following description, it is mainly referred to as a high base state.

  Here, electric Chu support control will be described. As electric support control, normal symbol variation time (time from the start of variation display to display result derivation display time) is shortened and the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), normal symbol The control to increase the probability that the stop symbol will be a winning symbol (ordinary symbol probability changing control), the control to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 (opening time extension control), and the number of opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased. Control (opening number increase control) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state is higher than when the control is not performed. Therefore, the winning frequency at the second start winning port 9014 is increased. As a result, the game ball becomes easier to start and win (the execution conditions for the variable display in the special symbol displays 908a and 908b and the effect display device 909 are easily established). By this control, the winning frequency to the second starting winning port 9014 is increased, so that a gaming state in which the frequency at which the second starting condition is established and / or the frequency of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state in which the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 9014 is increased by the electric Chu support control (high frequency state) is the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out as a winning ball according to the winning with respect to the number of shot balls. Since the “base” is in a higher state than when the control is not performed, it is called a “high base state”. Further, when such control is not performed, it is called a “low base state”. Such control is control for facilitating winning to the variable winning ball device 9015 by supporting the winning by the variable winning ball device 9015, that is, the electric tulip, and is referred to as “electric chew support control”.

  In this embodiment, “high probability state (probability variation state)” and “low probability state (non-probability variation state)” are used as terms indicating the state of jackpot probability, and terms indicating a combination of base states are used. , “High base state (electric Chu support control state)” and “low base state (non-electric Chu support control state)” are used.

  Further, in this embodiment, as a term indicating a combination of the state of the big hit probability and the base state, “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy high base state”, and “high accuracy high base state” are used. Use. The “low probability low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “low probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the high base state. The “high probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the high base state.

  As shown in FIG. 41, as the big hit of 15 rounds, a plurality of types of big hits, a normal big hit and a probable big hit, are provided. The normal jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to the non-probability changing state, the short time state, and the high base state (low probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds of the big hit gaming state. Normally, in the big hit, the non-probable change state continues for the period until the next big hit occurs, the condition that the short-time state and the high base state are executed a predetermined number of times, such as 100 fluctuation displays, and the next big hit It continues for a period until the earlier condition, which is the condition until the occurrence of, occurs. The normal big hit may be controlled so as to become a big hit controlled in a non-probability changing state, a non-time-short state, and a non-electricity chew support control state (low probability low base state).

  The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to the probability variation state, the time-short state, and the high base state (high probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds of the jackpot gaming state. In the probabilistic big hit, such a high-precise base state is satisfied, whichever is earlier, a condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times or a condition that the next big hit occurs. It continues for a period until.

  FIG. 42 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) and the effect control board. FIG. 42 also shows a payout control board 9037 and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 90560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. A game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 9055 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 9057 included. The game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer in which a ROM 9054 and a RAM 9055 are incorporated. The game control microcomputer 90560 further includes a random number circuit 90503 for generating hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 9055 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 9055 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 90560, the CPU 9056 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 9054. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on a board other than the main board 9031.

  The random number circuit 90503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to win a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. The random number circuit 90503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates the random data at random timing. Based on the fact that the starting winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value. Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 90503.

  An input driver circuit 9058 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 to the game control microcomputer 90560 is also mounted on the main board 9031. Also, an output circuit 9059 for driving a solenoid 9016 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 9015 and a solenoid 9021 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 9020 for forming a big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 90560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 9031.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 includes a first special symbol display 908a, a second special symbol display 908b, which variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 9010, which variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control is performed on the display 9018a, the second special symbol storage memory display 9018b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 9041.

  The effect control board 9080 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 90100, a ROM 90102, a RAM 90103, a VDP 90109, an I / O port unit 90105, and the like. The ROM 90102 stores an effect control program such as display control, data, and the like. The RAM 90103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 90102 and the RAM 90103 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 90100. The VDP 90109 controls display of the effect display device 909 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  The effect control microcomputer 90100 provides an effect control command for instructing the contents of the effect from the game control microcomputer 90560 via the relay board 9077 that allows the signal to pass only in one direction from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. And display control of the frame LED 9028 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver substrate 9035, and from the speaker 9027 via the audio output substrate 9070. Various effects are controlled, such as controlling the sound output.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90101 sends an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action to the trigger button 90125 of the stick controller 90122 is detected from the trigger sensor 90121 to the input port of the I / O port unit 90105. Enter through. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 90120 has been detected from the push sensor 90124 via the input port of the I / O port unit 90105. To do. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation stick of the stick controller 90122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 90123 and is input to the I / O port unit 90105. Enter through the port. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 90126 via the output port of the I / O port unit 90105, thereby causing the stick controller 90122 to vibrate.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 43, a random number type, an update range, a usage, and an addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

  (1) Random R ′: A random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random R ′ is updated one by one at 10 MHz, is added and updated from 0, and is added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then is added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1 ′ (MR1 ′): Determines the type of jackpot (any type of type, normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2 ′ (MR2 ′): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination). (4) Random 3 ′ (MR3 ′): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4 ′ (MR4 ′): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5 ′ (MR5 ′): An initial value of random 4 ′ is determined (for determining a random 4 ′ initial value).

  In this embodiment, the big hit that is the specific gaming state includes a plurality of types, that is, a normal big hit and a probable big hit. Therefore, when the big hit is determined based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random R ′), the big hit type is one of these based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1 ′). The jackpot type is determined. Furthermore, when the type of jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1 ′). Therefore, the random 1 ′ is also a jackpot symbol determining random number.

  The variation pattern is first determined using a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2 ′) and included in the variation pattern type determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3 ′). Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type. The variation pattern type may be referred to as a variation type.

  In this embodiment, the variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that does not involve reach and a reach variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that involves reach.

  When the display result is out of order, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different depending on whether it is in the short-time state or not in the short-time state. When this is the case, the variation time is shortened compared to when the time is not short. For example, in the short-time state, in order to shorten the average time of the fluctuation time compared to when the time-short state is not, the fluctuation time of a predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than when the time is not short, or the fluctuation pattern type is the most variable. The variation pattern type with the shortest time is selected more frequently, and even when the reach type is selected, the normal reach variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation pattern types. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time is shorter than when not in the time-short state.

  In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol that displays variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number and when it is less than the predetermined number, When the number of reserved symbols for each special symbol for variable display is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the number of reserved symbols for each special symbol is less than the predetermined number. You may make it do. For example, in the hold number shortening control state, the ratio of selecting a variation pattern type having a short variation display time, such as a normal variation pattern type, is set to be higher than in a case where the hold number shortening control state is not set. The average time of the variable display time may be shorter than that in the non-holding number shortening control state. In the hold number reduction control, the change display time itself of the change pattern type may be shortened even when the same change pattern type is selected as compared to the case where the hold number reduction control state is not set.

  The variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of the two-step determination method of determining the variation pattern after determining the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 44A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R ′ is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability change) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state), and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state.

  Each value described in the left column of FIG. 44 (A) is set as a big hit determination value in the normal jackpot determination table, and is described in the right column of FIG. 44 (A) in the probability change big hit determination table. Each value is set as a big hit judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (referred to as the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). Due to the addition of the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number (10 times the number of jackpot judgment values) than the probability change jackpot judgment table (referred to as the jackpot judgment value or the second jackpot judgment value at the time of probability change) is set. . As a result, the probability variation state is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

  The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R ′). The jackpot determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in (1), it is determined that the special symbol will be a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot). Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 44A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

  44B and 44C are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 9054. FIG. FIG. 44 (B) shows a case where a jackpot type is determined by using a holding memory (also referred to as a first holding memory) based on a game ball having won a first start winning opening 9013 (a variation display of the first special symbol is displayed). 1 is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) used when FIG. 44 (C) shows a case where a big hit type is determined using a holding memory (also referred to as a second holding memory) based on a game ball winning in the second start winning opening 9014 (the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). It is a 2nd special symbol jackpot type determination table used when it is performed.

  Each of the first and second special symbol jackpot type determination tables in FIGS. 44 (B) and 44 (C) is for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. Based on the random number (random 1 ′), the type of jackpot is determined as either “normal jackpot” or “probability variable jackpot”, and is also referred to in determining the jackpot symbol.

  In the first special symbol jackpot type judgment table of FIG. 44 (B), there are numerical values to be compared with random 1 ′ values, which are judgment values corresponding to “normal jackpot” and “probability big jackpot” (jackpot type). Judgment value) is set. The second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 44 (C) is a numerical value to be compared with the random 1 ′ value, and the determination values corresponding to each of “normal jackpot” and “probability big hit” (jackpot type Judgment value) is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 44B and 44C, the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to “normal jackpot” is also set as the determination value corresponding to “3” of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to “probable big hit” is also set as the determination value corresponding to “7” of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Using the jackpot type determination table, the CPU 9056 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value for which the random 1 ′ value matches as the jackpot type, and also uses the jackpot symbol for which the random 1 ′ value matches as the jackpot symbol. To decide. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

  The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 44 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 44 (C) have the same ratio determined for probability variation jackpots. In such a case, the big hit type determination table may not be divided between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the big hit type is selected from a plurality of types of big hits having different maximum round numbers in the big hit gaming state as the big hit type, the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. You may set so that the ratio by which the big hit type with many round numbers is selected becomes higher than the 1st special symbol big hit type determination table of (B). In this way, in the high base state, the big hit type selection is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. Also, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 44 (C) may have a higher ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 44 (B). . By doing so, the variation display of the second special symbol can be more likely to be a big hit than the variation display of the first special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table may be set to have a higher ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot than the second special symbol jackpot type determination table.

  Next, a variation pattern table used to select and determine the variation pattern of the special symbol and the effect symbol in the game control microcomputer 90560 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a variation pattern table used for determining a variation pattern in a table format.

  In FIG. 45, (a) shows a determination table for when the normal state is shifted, and (b) shows a determination table for when the short state is shifted. Further, (c) shows a normal big hit determination table, and (d) shows a probability variation big hit determination table. Each of the determination tables of FIGS. 45A to 45D is stored in the ROM 9054, is selected according to the gaming state, and is used to determine (determine) the variation pattern type and variation pattern.

  The determination table shown in FIG. 45 includes a variation pattern type determination table that indicates the relationship between random 2 ′ and the variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination table that indicates the relationship between random 3 ′ and variation patterns belonging to various types for each variation pattern type. Including.

  In the column of “variation pattern type” or “variation pattern” in each table of FIG. 45, “normal” or “normal variation” indicates a normal variation pattern that does not reach.

  Further, “normal reach” in each table in FIG. 45 indicates a fluctuation pattern of normal reach that does not perform a particularly flashy effect when the reach state is reached. “Super Reach” indicates a variation pattern for performing a reach effect in which a special effect image is displayed when the reach state is reached.

  Further, as described above, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the ratio selected when a big hit is higher than that of “normal reach” is high, and the reliability of the big hit is high. Furthermore, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is longer than that of “normal reach” (for example, normal reach 10 seconds, super reach 50 seconds to 80 seconds). In addition, four types of fluctuation patterns are set for the super reach, and the big hit expectation degree (the big win becomes the first super reach <the second super reach <the third super reach <the fourth super reach). (Possibility) is high.

  The “expectation” is a concept including an expectation for jackpot, an expectation for probability change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation (also referred to as reliability) for the big hit is an expectation degree (a ratio to be a big hit) when each reach fluctuation pattern is selected. For example, reach fluctuation is performed 100 times. If the number of hits is 60 times, the degree of expectation for the big hit is 60% (the appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears is 60%). In addition, the degree of expectation for probability variation refers to the degree of expectation (proportion of probability variation) that shifts to the probability variation state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined effect is displayed on the effect display device 909 until the display result is derived and displayed after the start of each variable display of the effect symbol as identification information and the first and second special symbols. There is a case where an effect called a pseudo-continuous effect (hereinafter referred to as a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed. A pseudo-ream is a pseudo display that is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed instead of a single fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for continuous variation.

  In addition, the pseudo-ream is within the variation time determined with respect to one start winning prize in order to make it appear as if multiple symbols of variable display (variable display) have been executed for one starting winning prize. The temporary stop and re-variation are executed (repeated) a predetermined number of times for all symbol sequences (left, middle, and right). For example, the greater the number of repeated re-executions (the total number of changes including the initial change and subsequent re-changes, also referred to as the pseudo-variable number of times), the greater the reliability of the big hit (the difference from the big hit) The ratio of the ratio that is selected when the jackpot is large, the ratio of the ratio that is jackpot, that is, the degree of reliability that is the jackpot) is increased. More specifically, the ratio selected when the jackpot is determined to be high suggests whether or not the jackpot gaming state is to be achieved by a pseudo-continuous effect. In the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, pseudo-continuous symbols (for example, symbols (numerals) attached with predetermined characters or characters, etc., which are not included in the effect symbols that are normally variable displayed (basically variable display) on the effect display device 909). )) Are temporarily stopped. It should be noted that in the quasi-continuation, the effect symbol (numerical symbol in the present embodiment) that normally displays variation (basically variation display) may be temporarily stopped. A combination of symbols temporarily stopped in the effect display device 909 is called a temporary stop symbol combination. The combination of the temporary stop symbols is determined as one of the pseudo consecutive chances among a plurality of types of chances (hereinafter referred to as pseudo consecutive eyes (pseudo consecutive chances)) consisting of combinations of symbols other than the jackpot symbol combination. What should I do?

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, there may be an effect that the effect symbol slides. Here, the slip refers to an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol stops in the variable display. In the second super reach, the reach appearance (reach) is reached by stopping after one of the two production symbols that have been temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas due to a slippage (combination of the symbols). The effect is such that a reach effect is executed.

  Note that the variation pattern shown in the loss determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is a display result of “out”. The variation pattern shown in the normal jackpot determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is a display result of “normal jackpot”. The variation pattern shown in the probability variation jackpot determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is the display result of “probability variation jackpot”.

  Based on these pieces of information, for example, the variation pattern “fourth super reach (80 seconds)” shown in the “variation pattern” column of FIG. It is shown that the variation pattern of the fourth super reach executed in seconds.

  In the table of FIG. 45, the fields “Random 2 ′ range” and “Variation pattern type” are described as a variation pattern type determination table section indicating the relationship between “Random 2 ′ range” and “Variation pattern type”. It is a column indicating a function. For example, taking FIG. 45 (a) as an example, all values of random 2 ′ (1 to 251) are assigned to each of a plurality of variation pattern types such as “normal”, “normal reach”, and “super reach”. Allocation is divided into multiple numerical ranges. For example, taking FIG. 45 (a) as an example, the random 2 ′ value extracted at a predetermined timing matches one of the determination values assigned to 140 to 229 among the random values 1 to 251. Then, “normal reach” is determined as the variation pattern type.

  In the table of FIG. 45, “random 3 ′ range” and “variation pattern” are described as a variation pattern determination table section indicating the relationship between “random 3 ′ range” and “variation pattern”. It is a column which shows. The variation patterns shown corresponding to each type of variation pattern type determination table are variation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking FIG. 45 (a) as an example, the variation patterns belonging to the type of “super reach” are “first super reach”, “second super reach”, “third super reach”, and “first super reach”. “4 Super Reach”.

  All of the random 3 ′ (1 to 220) values are assigned to each of a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to each variation pattern type in a plurality of numerical ranges. For example, taking FIG. 45 (a) as an example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type of “super reach” is selected, random 3 ′ extracted at a predetermined timing is 1 to 220 of random values. If it matches one of the determination values assigned to 1 to 70, it is determined that the variation pattern of “first super reach (50 seconds)” is set.

  When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is off, the determination table is selected as follows to determine the variation pattern. In the non-short-time state, when the fluctuation display result is out of place, the normal state out-of-state determination table in FIG. 45A is selected. On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of time in the time reduction state, the time reduction state determination table in FIG. 45B is selected. It should be noted that by using the determination tables of FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b), the reach ratio at the time of deviation from the normal state and from the time-short state is constant regardless of the number of holds.

  When the variation display result is a big hit for the first special symbol or the second special symbol regardless of whether the time is short or not, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. When the fluctuation display result is a normal big hit, the normal big hit determination table of FIG. 45 (c) is selected. When the fluctuation display result is a probable big hit regardless of whether the time is short or not, the probable big hit judgment table of FIG. 45 (d) is selected.

  In the time short state deviation determination table of FIG. 45 (b), the fluctuation time of normal fluctuation is set shorter than that in the normal state deviation time determination table of FIG. 45 (a). 45B, the fluctuation time is shorter than the reach fluctuation (including the normal reach fluctuation and the super reach fluctuation) compared to the normal state deviation determination table of FIG. 45A. So that the percentage determined for normal fluctuations (non-reach deviation fluctuations (variations resulting in deviation display results instead of reaching reach)) is low, and the percentage determined for reach fluctuations with longer fluctuation times than normal fluctuations is low. Data is set.

  As a result, compared to the non-time-short state (normal state), the rate of change in the short-time state is higher in the time-short state, so the time-short state is the non-time-short state. The change display is performed with a change time shorter than that in the mean time. By selecting the determination table in this way, the time saving state can be realized. In addition, by setting the normal fluctuation so that the fluctuation time is shorter in the time-short state than in the non-time-short state, it is possible to shorten the pending digestion during the time-short state.

  In the determination tables shown in FIGS. 45A and 45B that are selected when there is a loss, the data is set so that the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a height relationship such that normal reach> super reach. Has been. On the other hand, in the determination tables shown in FIGS. 45 (c) and 45 (d) that are selected when a big hit is made, the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a high / low relationship such that normal reach <super reach. Data is set. As a result, the ratio of super reach reach production (the ratio of super reach reach production when a reach is selected) is higher when a big hit is made than when it is out of reach. The performance can increase the player's expectation.

  In addition, the determination table shown in FIG. 45 (d) that is selected when a promising big hit out of the big hits has a normal reach compared to the determination table shown in FIG. 45 (c) that is selected when a big big hit is made. On the other hand, the data is set so that the ratio of selecting the type of super reach production is high. As a result, when the probability is a big hit, the ratio of the reach reach of the super reach (the ratio of the reach reach of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than the case of the normal big win. By performing the reach of reach, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a promising big hit.

  Note that such a variation pattern is obtained when the total number of reserved storage (total value) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that display variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, the total number of reserved storage is 3 or more). By setting the selection ratio to be different from when the number is less than the predetermined number, when the total number of pending storage is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the variation time is longer than when the total number of pending storage is less than the predetermined number It is also possible to execute the hold number shortening control for shortening. However, the expectation for reach can be maintained by keeping the ratio of reach (including normal reach and super reach) constant even under the condition that the hold number shortening control is executed (for example, the total number of stored holds is 3 or more). In addition, only the super reach in the reach may not be shortened so as to execute the hold time reduction control. Furthermore, the short time control of the number of holdings may be executable by selecting a high rate of normal fluctuation with a short fluctuation time, or may be executable by shortening the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern itself, The combination may be used.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560. As shown in FIG. 46, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits various effect control commands to the effect control microcomputer 90100 in accordance with the game control state.

  46, main commands will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol displayed in a variation on the effect display device 909 corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used as shown in FIG. 45, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 90101 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 909 controls the effect display device 909 to start the variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are display result designation commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of big hit.

  The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (design determination designation command) for designating to end the variation of the first and second special symbols.

  The commands A001 to A002 (H) are jackpot start designation commands that designate the jackpot gaming state start for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  The command A1XX (H) is a special winning opening open designation command that indicates a display during opening of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a designation command after opening the big prize opening indicating the opening (closing) of the big prize opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating the jackpot gaming state end for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  Command A 401 (H) is a first start winning designation command for designating that the first starting win has been received. Command A 402 (H) is a second start winning designation command for designating that there has been a second start winning.

  Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating that the gaming state is a normal state (low probability state). Command B001 (H) is a short time state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the short time state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a probability variation state designation command for designating that the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability state).

  Command C0XX (H) is a combined pending storage number designation command indicating the combined pending storage number. The command C100 (H) is a total pending storage number subtraction designation command indicating that the total pending storage number is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the total reserved memory number designation command is issued at the time of starting winning of a game ball to the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014 (for example, when a start opening switch passing process described later is executed). Then, it is sent to the production control microcomputer 90100 (see S901221 and S901232 in FIG. 50). In addition, the combined pending storage number subtraction designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 90100 at the time of starting the variable display (for example, when executing the special symbol variable display processing described later). Note that the combined pending storage designation command and the pending storage count subtraction designation command may be used together. For example, a combined reserved memory number designation command may be used as a command that can specify the number of reserved memories after subtraction. Note that the command for specifying the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is transmitted instead of the total reserved memory number, and the effect control microcomputer 90100 transmits the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. May be specified as the total pending storage number.

  The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are the results of winning determination results such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014, etc. This is an effect control command indicating the contents. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the winning determination result is a big hit and the determination result of the type of big hit. The command C3XX (H) is a variation type command that indicates a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the random value for variation pattern type determination among the winning determination results. It is.

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing (see S901217 and S901228 in FIG. 50), whether the game control microcomputer 90560 is a big hit at the start winning, whether the big hit type, the random number for determining the variation pattern type It is determined which range of the determination value is in the range. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating the big hit and a value for designating the type of the big win are set, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed. A value for designating a range of a judgment value as a judgment result of the fluctuation pattern type is set in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 90100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit and the type of the big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, The variation pattern type can be recognized based on the variation type command.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage buffer in the game control microcomputer 90560.

  FIG. 47A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). The reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 9055 (the area in the RAM 9055), and as shown in FIG. 47A, the maximum value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number (in this example, 8). ) Is reserved. FIG. 47A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (A), the reserved specific area is “first” or “second” in the order of winning based on winning in the first starting winning port 9013 or the second starting winning port 9014. The indicated data is set. Therefore, data that can specify the winning order to the first start winning opening 9013 and the second start winning opening 9014 is stored in the reserved specific area. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 9055.

  FIG. 47B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a storage area (hold storage buffer) that stores random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold storage. As shown in FIG. 47B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a jackpot determination random number (random R ′) that is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1 ′) that is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination. The random number for random use (random 2 ′) and the random number for variation pattern determination (random 3 ′) are stored.

  Based on winning in the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014, the CPU 9056 extracts such random number values from the random number circuit 90503 and a random counter for generating software random numbers, A process of saving (storing) in the saving area in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer is executed. Specifically, based on the winning at the first start winning opening 9013, these random number values are extracted and stored in the first reserved storage buffer. Further, based on the winning at the second start winning opening 9014, these random number values are extracted and stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

  In this manner, storing the information related to the start winning as described above in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer may be indicated as “hold stored”. In addition, numerical data stored in the first reserved storage buffer may be referred to as first reserved storage information, and numerical data stored in the second reserved storage buffer may be referred to as second reserved storage information. Note that the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2 ′) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3 ′) are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in advance in the storage area, but will be described later. You may make it extract in a process (at the time of the change start of a special symbol).

  The data stored in the reserved specific area and the storage area in this way is read out at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display. Before starting the variable display, the data stored in the hold specific area and the storage area is read out at the time of start winning, and the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” is started. It may be used for pre-reading notice effects that can be executed based on the hold information of the variable display.

  When there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 9013 or the second start prize opening 9014, commands such as a symbol designation command, a variation type command, and a combined pending memory number designation command are sent from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. Sent. In the start winning prize reception command buffer provided in the RAM 90103 of the effect control microcomputer 90100, various commands such as the received symbol designation command, variation type command, and total pending memory number designation command can be stored in association with each other. A storage area for storing data that can identify the received command is secured.

  In this embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect symbol performed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, the variation display operation of the effect symbol, the reach It is composed of data indicating the contents of control of various effect operations, such as effect display operations in effects, etc., or various effect operations that are not accompanied by display changes of effect symbols. The notice effect control pattern includes data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are configured by data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically executed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) and the timer interrupt process is executed. As a result, various game controls can be executed.

  In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, normal time initialization processing, gaming state restoration processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (random number circuit 90503 is initially set), display random number update processing (variation pattern) (Variable random number update processing such as type determination and variation pattern determination), initial value random number update processing (ordinary symbol determination random number generation counter initial value initial value update processing), and the like.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S9034 (hereinafter simply referred to as “S”) shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is set) is executed (S9020). Next, detection signals of the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 are input via the input driver circuit 9058, and the state determination is performed (switch processing: S9021). .

  Next, the CPU 9056 includes a first special symbol display 908a, a second special symbol display 908b, a normal symbol display 9010, a first special symbol hold storage display 9018a, a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 9041 is executed (S9022). For the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, and the normal symbol display 9010, a control for outputting a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S9032 and S9033. Execute.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating a random number for determination such as a random number for normal symbol determination and a random number for jackpot type determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S9023). . The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S9024, S9025).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs special symbol process processing (S9026). In the special symbol process, a corresponding symbol is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The value of the flag is updated according to the gaming state.

  Next, the normal symbol process is performed (S9027). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 9056 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 9010 in a predetermined order, and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state. Update accordingly.

  Further, CPU 9056 performs a process of sending an effect control command to effect control microcomputer 90100 (effect control command control process: S9028). Further, the CPU 9056 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (S9029).

  Further, the CPU 9056 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 (S9030).

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 9056 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (S9031: output processing).

  CPU 9056 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in the output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( S9032).

  Further, CPU 9056 performs normal symbol display control processing for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of normal symbols in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S9033). Further, the CPU 9056 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 by outputting a drive signal in S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S9034), and the process ends. With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every predetermined time.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process (S9026). In the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, a start port switch passing process is executed (S90312). Then, any one of S90300 to S90307 is performed according to the internal state.

  In the game control microcomputer 90560, as described above, the RAM 9055 stores on-hold storage data (first on-hold storage data) such as a big hit determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 9013. And a second reserved storage buffer for storing reserved storage data (second reserved storage data) such as a big hit determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the second starting winning opening 9014 Is provided. In each of these reserved storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the number of each reserved storage is secured.

  In the start port switch passing process, if the first start port switch 9013a is turned on, the number of the first reserved storage data is stored on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). 1 is incremented by 1 and the numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination) are obtained from the random number circuit 90503 or a counter for generating a software random number. (Random number for use) is extracted, and processing for storing (storing) them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, and a process of storing (storing) data indicating “first” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter after the summation is executed. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 9014a is on, the second number of stored second stored data is counted on condition that the second number of stored storage has not reached the upper limit (for example, 4). Increase the value of the pending storage number counter by 1 and extract numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number) from the random number circuit 90503 or a counter for generating a software random number Then, a process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, and a process of storing (storing) data indicating “second” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter after the summation is executed.

  The processing of S90300 to S90307 is as follows. The special symbol normal process (S90300) is a process for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and determining the big hit type in the case of the big hit. The variation pattern setting process (S90301) determines the variation pattern (variation pattern type determination random number and variation pattern determination random number using the variation pattern determination random number) and measures the variation time according to the determined variation pattern. This is a process for performing control such as the start of timing of the fluctuation time timer.

  The display result designation command transmission process (S90302) is a process for performing control to transmit a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. The special symbol changing process (S90303) is a process of proceeding to the special symbol stop process when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses. The special symbol stop process (S90304) displays the fluctuation display on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b when the fluctuation time corresponding to the decided fluctuation pattern is timed by the fluctuation time timer. This is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

  The pre-opening process for the big winning opening (S90305) is a process for performing control for opening the big winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 according to the type of the big hit. In the special winning opening opening process (S90306), the control for transmitting the presentation control command for the round display production in the big hit gaming state to the production control microcomputer 90100 and the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening are confirmed. This is processing for performing processing and the like. If the conditions for closing the big prize opening are satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (S90305). When all the rounds are finished, the process proceeds to the big hit end process (S90307). The big hit end process (S90307) is a process for performing control or the like for causing the microcomputer 90100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in S90312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 9056 first checks whether or not the first start port switch 9013a is in an ON state (S901212). If the first start port switch 9013a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to S901222. If the first start port switch 9013a is on, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (S90112). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to S901222.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (S901213), and sets the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number. Increase by 1 (S901214). In addition, the CPU 9056 stores the total pending storage in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specific area) for storing the winning order to the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014 described in FIG. Data indicating “first” is set in an area corresponding to the value of the number counter (S901215).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 9013a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 9013), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start port switch 9014a is turned on (that is, when the game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 9014), data indicating “second” is set. For example, when the first start port switch 9013a is turned on in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) shown in FIG. 47, the CPU 9056 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first”. When the second start port switch 9014a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  As shown in FIG. 47A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area, and the first start winning opening 9013 or The data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the second start winning opening 9014. Therefore, the winning order to the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014 is stored in the hold storage specifying information storage area (hold specifying area).

  Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 90503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 47B) ( S901216). In the processing of S901216, the jackpot determination random number (random R ′), the jackpot type determination random number (random 1 ′), the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2 ′), and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3 ′). Are extracted and stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 9056 executes a prize presentation effect process that preliminarily determines a fluctuation display result and a fluctuation pattern type when a fluctuation based on the detected start prize is executed (S901217). Then, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (S901218), and transmits the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Control is performed (S901219). Further, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (S901220), sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to EXT data, and outputs the total pending storage number designation command. Control to transmit to the production control microcomputer 90100 is performed (S901221).

  By executing the processing of S901218 and S901219, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (gaming state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot gaming state, etc.) Each time a start winning is made in the start winning opening 9013, both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are always transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 9013 occurs by executing the processing of S901218 to S901221, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the first start prize designation command A set of four commands, that is, a total pending storage number designation command, is transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the second start port switch 9014a is on (S901222). If the second start port switch 9014a is not in the ON state, the process is terminated as it is. If the second start port switch 9014a is on, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (S901223). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (S901224) and sets the value of the aggregate reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number. Increase by 1 (S901225). In addition, the CPU 9056 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (S901226).

  Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 90503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 47B) ( S901227). In the processing of S901227, the big hit determination random number (random R ′), the big hit type determination random number (random 1 ′), the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2 ′), and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) ′) Is extracted and stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 9056 executes prize-winning effect processing (S901228). Then, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (S901229), and control to transmit the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Is performed (S901230). In addition, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (S901231), sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to EXT data, and outputs the total pending storage number designation command. Control to transmit to the production control microcomputer 90100 is performed (S901232).

  By executing the processing of S901229 and S901230, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (the gaming state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot gaming state, etc.) Each time a start winning prize is received in the start winning opening 9014, both the symbol designating command and the variation type command are always transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the second start winning opening 9014 occurs by executing the processing of S901229 to S901232, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the second start prize designation command A set of four commands, that is, a total pending storage number designation command, is transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal process (S90300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 9056 checks whether there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (S9051). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, a customer waiting state designation command for designating the customer waiting state mode is sent if the customer waiting state designation command has not yet been transmitted. Processing for transmission is performed (S9077), and the special symbol normal processing is terminated. Here, when a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting state designation command transmission completion flag indicating that the customer waiting state designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption after sending the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting state designation command has already been sent based on the fact that the customer waiting state designation command sent flag has been set. It is controlled not to send the wait state specification command. Such a customer waiting state designation command transmitted flag is reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the CPU 9056 determines that the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 47A) is “first”. It is confirmed whether or not the data indicates (S9052). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in S9052), the CPU 9056 displays the special symbol pointer (first Data indicating “second” is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol (S9053). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating “first” (Y in S9052), the CPU 9056 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (S9054).

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a is set according to whether the data indicating "first" or the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. And the second special symbol display on the second special symbol display 908b are executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol display unit 908a performs variable display of the first special symbol on the basis of the reserved storage data stored in the first reservation storage buffer. It is. On the other hand, when data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 908b based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer. Is done.

  By executing the processing of S9052 to S9054, in this embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014. Alternatively, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 9055, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 9055 (S9055). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 stores each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 9055. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 9056 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 9055.

  Then, the CPU 9056 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S9056). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and stores each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer are shifted.

  After executing the processing of S9056, the count value of the total pending storage number counter that is formed in the RAM 9055 and counts the total pending storage number is decremented by 1 (S9057). Note that the CPU 9056 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 9055, and shifts the contents stored in the pending specific storage area.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 stores in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 9055. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 9055. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 9056 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved storage number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m−1. Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 9013, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 9014 Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of S90300-S90307 can be made common in the case where the first special symbol is the target and the case where the second special symbol is the target.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads a random R ′ (a jackpot determination random number) from the holding storage buffer, and executes a jackpot determination module (S9061). In this case, the CPU 9056 reads the jackpot determination random number extracted in S901216 of the start port switch passing process or S901227 of the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer, To do. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 44) determined in advance with a jackpot determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. In other words, this is a program for executing the big hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is in a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state). Specifically, a jackpot determination table at the time of probability change in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 44A in the ROM 9054 are set) and the number of jackpot determination values are variable. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 44A in the ROM 9054 are set) set to be smaller than the hour big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the CPU 9056 performs a jackpot determination process using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state. When the state is short or short, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for determining big hit (random R ′) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 44A, the CPU 9056 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is determined to be a big hit (Y in S9061), the process proceeds to S9071. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the jackpot end process (S90307 in FIG. 49) when the probability variation jackpot is reached, and then the condition that the next jackpot has been determined or the variation display that results in an outlier display result. When the condition that the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) has been executed is satisfied, the variation display of the special symbol is terminated and the stop symbol is reset at the timing to stop display.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R ′) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in S9061), the process proceeds to S9075 described later.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R ′) matches any of the jackpot determination values in S9061, the CPU 9056 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (S9071). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as tables used for determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 44 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type of FIG. 44 (C). One of the determination tables is selected (S9072). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 9056 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads out the jackpot type determination random number extracted in the start switch passing process and stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer in advance, and uses the jackpot type determination table selected in S9072 to hold it. The jackpot type and jackpot symbol corresponding to the value that matches the random number (random 1 ′) for jackpot type determination stored in the storage buffer is determined (S9073).

  As shown in FIGS. 44 (B) and 44 (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol is set so that the jackpot symbol is different for each jackpot type. Since the big hit type and the big hit symbol are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the big hit symbol and the game control corresponding to the big hit type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  Further, the CPU 9056 sets the big hit type data indicating the determined big hit type in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 9055 (S9074). For example, when the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “01” is set as the jackpot type data. When the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “02” is set as the big hit type data.

  Next, the CPU 9056 sets a special symbol stop symbol (S9075). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, “−”, which is a lost symbol, is set as a special symbol stop symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in S9073 is set as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be “probable variation jackpot”, “7” is set as a special symbol stop symbol. When the jackpot type is determined as “normal jackpot”, “3” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S90301) (S9076).

  In the display result designation command transmission process (S90302) described above, the CPU 9056 selects any one of the display result 1 designation command to the display result 3 designation command for designating the display result in accordance with the determined type of jackpot or loss. Control for transmitting the effect control command (see FIG. 46).

  In the special symbol changing process (S90303) described above, the CPU 9056 decrements the variable time timer by 1, and when the variable time timer times out, the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop process (S90304). Update to the value and proceed to the special symbol stop process.

  As a result of the variable display, when the big win is achieved, the big winning opening opening pre-processing (S90305), the big winning opening open processing (S90306), and the big winning end processing (S90307) are executed to control the big winning game state. Is done. In the big hit end process (S90307), the probability change flag and the hourly flag are set when the probability change big hit ends, and the hourly flag is set when the normal big hit ends. As a result, after the end of the probable big hit, the state is controlled to the probable change state and the short time state.

  It is necessary to continue the time-short state after the probable big hit and the normal big hit until one of the conditions of the change display is executed 100 times and the next big hit occurs. In such a duration of 100 fluctuation displays, in the jackpot ending process (S90307), a time-count counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time-saving state is set to 100, and thereafter, the fluctuation display is executed. The special time stop process is performed by subtracting and updating. Based on the fact that the time reduction counter has counted up, the time reduction flag is reset to control to end the time reduction state.

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 90100 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, effect control CPU 90101) mounted on the effect control board 9080.

  When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90101 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S90701). ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (S90702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the effect control main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the flag (S90703), and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets data such as a flag that can specify what the received effect control command indicates. Processing (for example, processing for storing data that can identify received commands in various command storage areas provided in the RAM 90103, etc.) is performed (command analysis processing: S90704). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs effect control process processing (S90705). In the effect control process, in order to perform various effects such as a change display of effect symbols on the effect display device 909 in accordance with the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S90704, the current control among the processes according to the control state A process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) is selected and the effect control is executed.

  Next, random numbers (SR1′-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1′-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1 for determining the right stop symbol of the effect symbol used by the microcomputer 90100 for effect control) '-3, SR2' for determining the region effect execution, SR3 'for determining the region effect execution timing, SR4' for determining the first region effect, SR5 'for determining the second region effect) A random number update process for updating the count value is executed (S90706). Each of such random numbers SR1′-1 to SR5 ′ is generated by counting of a random counter that updates the count value by software, and is cyclically updated within a predetermined range for each. By being extracted at a predetermined timing, it is used as a random number.

  Next, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (moving or deleting the hold display, etc.) is executed (S90707).

  By performing such effect control main processing, the effect control microcomputer 90100 transmits an effect display device 909, various lamps, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560 and received. By controlling the production devices such as the speakers 9027L and 9027R, various production controls according to the gaming state are performed.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S90705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 executes the pre-read effect process (S90500) for determining whether to perform the pre-read effect and selecting the type of the pre-read effect, and then the value of the effect control process flag. Depending on the process, any one of S90800 to S90807 is performed.

  In the effect control process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 909 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol. The control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second special symbol. Control related to the change display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the effect is also executed in one effect control process.

  The pre-reading effect process (S90500) is a process of performing pre-reading determination such as whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and determining an effect mode when the pre-reading effect is executed. The pre-reading effect is a special symbol change based on the hold information by pre-reading the hold information before the order of the change display (symbol change) of the special symbol based on the hold information (holding storage information) comes. This is a production technique such as determining the contents of display and giving a notice in advance of how the future special symbols will change. For example, when the hold information is a jackpot, before the variable display by the hold information is executed, the jackpot may occur later based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information. An effect such as giving a notice is performed as a look-ahead effect. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display based on the hold information as the target of the pre-reading effect is referred to as “target fluctuation display”.

  The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S90800) is a process for performing a process of confirming whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 90560. If the variation pattern command has been received, the process proceeds to the effect symbol variation start process.

  The effect symbol variation start process (S90801) is a process for controlling the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) to be started. The effect symbol variation processing (S90802) is processing for performing processing for controlling switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern. The effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S90803) is a process of performing control for stopping the fluctuation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result of the fluctuation display (final stop symbol).

  The jackpot display process (S90804) is a process of performing display control such as a control for displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the effect display device 909 of the occurrence of the jackpot after the end of the variation time. The round process (S90805) is a process for performing display control during a round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the process proceeds to post-round processing, and if the final round has ended, the process proceeds to jackpot end processing. The post-round processing (S90806) is processing for performing display control between rounds. If the round start condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to in-round processing. The jackpot end effect process (S90807) is a process of performing display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended in the effect display device 909.

  The effect control CPU 90101 is a process stored in the ROM 90102 during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display and from the start of the big hit gaming state to the end of the big hit gaming state. In accordance with the process data set in the table, an effect device (effect parts) such as the effect display device 909 is controlled.

  The process table includes process timer set values and data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S90801) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 90101 performs the following process.

  In the effect symbol variation start process, it is confirmed whether or not the variation display result is determined to be off (S90601). Whether or not it is determined to be out of place is determined by, for example, whether or not the display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is determined to be off, it is confirmed whether a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received as the fluctuation pattern command (S90602). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received is determined by, for example, data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  If it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received, the display result of the loss that does not become reach is determined as the final stop of the effect symbol using the loss symbol determination data table stored in the ROM 90102 (S90604). The process proceeds to S90616. In the loss symbol determination data table, the numerical data of SR1′-1 to SR1′-3 is associated with each of the plurality of types of effect symbols.

  In the process of S90604, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from each of SR1'-1 to SR1'-3 at a predetermined timing, and the symbols corresponding to the extracted numerical data are respectively left using the outlier design determining data table. , Determined to be a combination of stop symbols that will result in variable display of the middle and right effect symbols. In this way, when determining a combination of non-reach symbols, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number coincides with a combination of accidental jackpot symbols, it is corrected so as to be a combination of outlier symbols (for example, Each stop symbol is determined by correcting the right symbol by one symbol). In addition, when the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is accidentally reached, it is corrected so as to be a combination of non-reach off symbols (for example, the right symbol is shifted by one symbol) and each stop symbol is corrected. Is determined.

  If it is determined in the process of S90602 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (when it is determined that the pattern is a reach variation pattern), the stop symbol of the effect symbol constituting the reach symbol combination is determined (S90605), and the process proceeds to S90616. In the process of S90605, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from each of SR1′-1 to SR1′-3 at a predetermined timing, and the random symbol extracted from SR1′-1 is used by using the data design data for detachment symbol determination. The symbols to be processed are determined as stop symbols for the left and right effect symbols that form the reach state, and the symbol corresponding to the random number that matches the counter value extracted from SR1'-2 is determined as the stop symbol for the middle symbols. The In this case as well, when the symbol combination is accidentally a combination of symbols, the stop symbols are determined by correcting the symbols so that they become a combination of symbols that are out of place (for example, correction for shifting the middle symbol by one symbol).

  In addition, when it is not determined to be shifted in the processing of S90601 (when it is determined to be a big hit) (N of S90601), the effect control CPU 90101 displays the big hit symbol according to the type of the big hit. A stop symbol of the effect symbols constituting the combination is determined (S90603), and the process proceeds to S90616.

  In S90603, a winning symbol combination is determined according to the type of jackpot as follows. Based on which display result designation command of the display result 2 designation command and the display result 3 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area, the type of jackpot between the probability big hit and the normal big hit Is determined, and it is determined that the probability variation big hit is decided, the numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1′-1 at a predetermined timing, and the combination of SR1′-1 and the probability variation big hit symbol (for example, Using the data table (probability big hit symbol determination table) in which the relationship with the left, middle, and right is a combination of odd numbers such as “7, 7, 7”, etc. The combination of jackpot symbols is selected and determined. Further, when it is determined that it is determined to be a normal jackpot, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from SR1′-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1′-1 and a normal jackpot symbol (for example, left, Using the data table (ordinary jackpot symbol determination table) in which the relationship between the middle and right is an even combination of even numbers such as “4, 4, 4”, etc. The combination of is selected and determined. The symbol determined in this way is used as a final stop symbol which is a variation display result before being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  Next, the first area effect and the second area effect as area effects executed in this embodiment, and the special effect and timer effect executed in the first area effect will be described.

[First area production]
The first area effects are all effects executed in the first area 9091 (see FIG. 55) located at the lower left of the effect display device 909 when the variable display based on the stored storage information is executed. During the execution of the first region effect, an effect that displays a timer after executing a special effect, which will be described later, and executes a timer effect, or a so-called gas effect (“GASE” that displays nothing after executing a special effect is “ An effect is executed that includes the meaning of “false”. The first area effect is not limited to the first area 9091, and may be executed in any display area of the effect display device 909.

[Special production]
In the special effect, the timer effect is executed after the special effect is executed by executing a “visible / hidden display” in which the timer frame 9097 that suggests the execution of the timer effect is displayed or not displayed in the first area 9091. It is an effect that displays a suggestion that suggests. After executing the special effect for a predetermined time, the timer effect or the gaze effect that does not execute the timer effect is executed from the special effect. The special effect is not limited to the effect described above, and may be an effect suggesting execution of the timer effect. For example, the effect may indicate whether or not a semi-transparent timer frame is realized.

[Timer production]
The timer effect is obtained by updating a period display that indicates an effect period such as a waiting time until execution of a specific effect after execution of the special effect in a timer display format when the variable display based on the stored storage information is executed. When the display is in a predetermined mode, it is an effect that executes any one of a plurality of types of effects. In the timer display, the count value is updated from the initial value of the count value set at a predetermined timing, and finally, the timer display value becomes 0 (value indicating 0 seconds). Such a timer display displayed during the timer effect is displayed in the first area 9091 over a predetermined period during the variable display.

[Second area production]
The second area effect is a plurality of types of predetermined displays that suggest a display result of the variable display and an effect executed during the change after the specific effect described later is executed when the variable display based on the stored storage information is executed. An effect of displaying one of the predetermined displays is executed. The second area effect is not limited to the second area 9092, and may be executed in any display area of the effect display device 909.

  The specific effect is an effect suggesting that one predetermined display among a plurality of types of predetermined displays is displayed. After executing the specific effect for a predetermined time, for example, one predetermined display is displayed among a plurality of types of predetermined displays indicating the effect state or the game state such as “?”, “NEXT”, and “READY GO”. As a specific effect, for example, a virtual rotating reel with all predetermined indications is rotated for a predetermined time at a speed at which it is impossible to visually recognize which predetermined indication is displayed, and then gradually rotated. After the speed is lowered and the predetermined display is made visible, an effect of stopping at a position where one predetermined display can be visually recognized is executed. The specific effect is not limited to the above-described effect, but may be an effect that suggests that one predetermined display among a plurality of types of predetermined displays is displayed. Further, the predetermined display includes a timer effect suggestion display that suggests a timer effect and a plurality of types of specific displays other than the timer effect suggestion display. The specific display will be described later (see FIG. 59).

  FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining a region effect including a first region effect and a second region effect. FIG. 55A is a diagram illustrating a display example of the effect display device 909 at the start of change when the region effect is not executed. FIGS. 55B to 55D are diagrams showing display examples of the effect display device 909 during the first region effect. FIGS. 55E and 55F are diagrams showing display examples of the effect display device 909 during execution of the second region effect. In FIG. 55, the state in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols are variably displayed is indicated by three downward arrows.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), in the display area of the effect display device 909, a display area of a first area 9091 capable of executing the first area effect is provided on the lower left side, and the second area effect is provided on the lower right side. A display area of an executable second area 9092 is provided. In the first area 9091, an image related to the area is basically not displayed, and an image related to the area is displayed as necessary. In FIG. 55A, in the second area 9092, an image relating to the area is always displayed.

  FIG. 55 (a) shows a state in which neither the area effect of the first area effect nor the second area effect is executed when the change of the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol is started. Specifically, nothing is displayed in the first area 9091 indicated by a broken line in the drawing. In the second area 9092, a frame that can specify that the area is the second area 9092 is displayed. Moreover, the area | region inside a frame part is displayed by the display mode which shows a shutter, for example (illustration omitted), and the shutter part is normally closed. Then, when the second region effect is executed, the shutter portion is opened.

  As shown in FIG. 55D, the timer effect image displayed when the first region effect is executed in the first region 9091 is a timer frame 9097 and a timer display that displays a timer value in the timer frame 9097. 9094. Each image of the timer frame 9097 and the timer value is displayed in one of a plurality of display colors such as white and red (see FIG. 58).

  When the first area effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), in the first area 9091, the timer frame 9097 of a color selected from a plurality of display colors is reciprocated in the direction of the arrow in the symbol. By displaying the image to be displayed, a special effect of performing “visible / hidden display” is repeatedly performed which is repeatedly displayed or not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 909.

  After execution of the special effect, a gas effect as shown in FIG. 55 (c) or a timer effect as shown in FIG. 55 (d) is executed. As shown in FIG. 55 (c), the gaze effect is an effect in which the timer effect is not executed, and nothing is displayed in the first area 9091 by erasing the timer frame 9097 that is visible and hidden. It becomes a state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55 (d), when the timer effect is executed, the timer frame 9097 that is visible and hidden is displayed in any one of a plurality of display colors in the first area 9091. The In the timer frame 9097, a timer display 9094 appears and appears in any one of a plurality of display colors, and a time period such as “10:00” indicating 10 seconds is indicated as a timer value. . In the timer effect, after such a timing period is shown in the timer display 9094, the countdown timing in the timer display 9094 is started.

  In the timer effect, when the countdown of the timer display 9094 proceeds and the timer value of the timer display 9094 becomes “00:00” indicating 0 second, the effect control starts the super reach effect specified by the change pattern command at the start of change. Is executed.

  As described above, when the first area effect is executed, the timer display 9094 is displayed in the first area 9091 and the timer effect is executed, and then the predetermined effect such as the super reach effect can be executed. Thereby, when a special effect in which the timer frame 9097 is displayed and hidden is executed in the first area effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the timer effect is executed.

  Further, after the special effect shown in FIG. 55 (b) is executed, the timer effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 55 (d) and may not be executed as shown in FIG. 55 (c). It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the timer effect will be executed before executing the timer effect, and to improve the interest of the game in the process before the timer effect is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), in the first area 9091, the timer effect is displayed by executing a special effect suggesting that the timer display 9094 is executed by showing and hiding the timer frame 9097. It can be noted whether or not it is executed, and the interest of the game can be further improved in the process before the timer effect is executed.

  When the second region effect is executed in the second region 9092, as shown in FIG. 55 (d), in the specific effect, “?”, “NEXT”, and , “READY GO” and the like are sequentially displayed as indicated by the arrows in the figure, which indicate a plurality of types of indications indicating the effect state or the game state. Then, after a specific period has elapsed since the start of the specific effect, any one of a plurality of types of predetermined displays is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. In the figure, an example is shown in which the predetermined display of “extreme heat” is stopped and displayed.

  In the second area effect, when any kind of predetermined display is stopped and displayed in the second area 9092, an effect corresponding to the stopped and displayed predetermined display is subsequently executed. For example, when a predetermined display “READY GO” is designated and displayed, a predetermined timer effect is executed. When the predetermined display “NEXT” is designated and displayed, the above-described pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

  Thus, after the second area effect is executed, various effects corresponding to the predetermined display stopped and displayed in the second area 9092 can be executed. Thereby, when a 2nd specific production is performed, a player's attention can be drawn to the display of the 2nd field 9092, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  In the first other embodiment, the special effect is an effect that executes “visible / hidden display”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any effect that suggests execution of a timer effect may be used. For example, an effect of displaying a translucent timer frame or an effect of displaying a virtual rotating reel with a plurality of types of timer values and rotating the rotating reel may be used. Further, the specific effect is an effect of rotating a virtual rotating reel, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any effect that suggests that one predetermined display among a plurality of types of predetermined displays is displayed. For example, an effect of displaying a virtual shutter in the second area 9092 and opening and closing the shutter, or an effect of displaying a predetermined display in the second area 9092 in a translucent manner may be used.

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a region effect execution determination table for determining whether or not to perform execution and a type of effect to be executed for the region effect including the first region effect and the second region effect. The area effect execution determination table includes the (A) big hit hour area effect execution determination table and the (B) off-time region effect execution determination table. Each area effect execution determination table is stored in the ROM 90102.

  The jackpot time region effect execution determination table (A) is used when it is determined that the variation display result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the jackpot display result. The off-time region effect execution determination table of (B) is used when it is determined that the variation display result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the non-display result.

  In each area effect execution determination table of (A) and (B), a total of 100 numerical values of the random effect SR2 ′ (numerical value range 0 to 99) for determining area effect execution do not execute any area effect (effect). None), a decision to execute only the first area effect, a determination to execute only the second area effect, and a decision to execute both the first area effect and the second area effect. For SR2 ′, the number of assigned random number values is shown for clarity of explanation.

  In the big hit area effect execution determination table of (A), “no effect <only first area effect <only second area effect <first area effect + second area effect” depending on the value of SR2 ′ extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so as to have a selection ratio of a magnitude relationship of “both”.

  In the outlier region effect execution determination table of (B), “no effect> only first region effect> only second region effect> first region effect + second region effect depending on the value of SR2 ′ extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so as to have a selection ratio of a magnitude relationship of “both”.

  In each area effect execution determination table of (A) and (B), data is set as follows. At the time of big hit, the data is set so that the ratio of executing at least one of the area effects including the first area effect and the second area effect is higher than that at the time of the loss.

  Specifically, the data is set so that the rate at which only the first area effect is executed is higher at the time of big hit than at the time of loss. At the big hit, the data is set so that the ratio of only the second area effect being executed is higher than that at the time of loss. Data is set so that the ratio of executing both the first area effect and the second area effect is higher at the time of big hit than at the time of loss. At the time of big hit, compared with the time of losing, the ratio where both the first area effect and the second area effect are executed is higher than the ratio where only the first area effect or only the second area effect is executed. Data is set.

  Thus, each of the first area effect and the second area effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio in each of the big hit time and the off time. Thereby, a player's interest can be heightened about each of a 1st area | region effect and a 2nd area | region effect in each at the time of big hit, and the time of off.

  Moreover, about each of the 1st area | region effect and the 2nd area | region effect, the ratio performed at the time of big hit is high compared with the time of losing. Thereby, when each of the first area effect and the second area effect is executed, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the big hit, and to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, at the time of big hit, the ratio that both the first area effect and the second area effect are executed is higher than the ratio that only the first area effect is executed and the ratio that only the second area effect is executed. Is also expensive. Thus, when both the first area effect and the second area effect are executed, the player is compared with when only the first area effect is executed or when only the second area effect is executed. The expectation for the big hit in can be raised and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the area effect execution determination table, the selection ratio of the first area effect and the selection ratio of the second area effect may be the same or different for each of the big hit time and the off time. In the area effect execution determination table, the ratio of executing both the first area effect and the second area effect may be lower than the ratio of executing only the first area effect at the time of big hit, It may be lower than the rate at which only the performance is executed. In the area effect execution determination table, both the first area effect and the second area effect may be executed only at the time of a big hit. Moreover, in the area effect execution determination table, both the first area effect and the second area effect may not be executed. In addition, the data may be set so that at the time of big hit, the ratio of executing at least one of the area effects including the first area effect and the second area effect is lower than that at the time of the loss.

  As shown in FIG. 56, instead of determining the regional effects as a batch, the individual effects to be executed may be determined individually using different determination random numbers.

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing an area effect execution timing table for determining the execution timing of an area effect when it is determined to execute at least one of the area effects in the area effect execution determination table of FIG. It is. The area effect execution timing determination table includes the (A) big hit hour area effect execution timing determination table and the (B) off-time region effect execution timing determination table. These area effect execution timing determination tables are stored in the ROM 90102.

  The jackpot time region effect execution timing determination table (A) is used when it is determined that the variation display result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the jackpot display result. The off-time region effect execution timing determination table of (B) is used when it is determined that the variation display result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the display result.

  In each area effect execution timing determination table of (A) and (B), a total of 30 numerical values of the random effect SR3 ′ (value range of 0 to 29) for determining the area effect execution timing are the first value at the start of the variable display. And a second timing before the start of reach. For SR3 ′, the number of allocated random values is shown for clarity of explanation.

  In the big hit time region effect execution timing determination table of (A), the data is set so that the selection ratio of the magnitude relation of “at the start of fluctuation display <at the start of reach” is set according to the value of SR3 ′ extracted at a predetermined timing. Has been. In the off-time region effect execution timing determination table of (B), data is set so that the selection ratio of the magnitude relationship of “at the start of fluctuation display> at the time before start of reach” is set according to the value of SR3 ′ extracted at a predetermined timing. Has been. Here, “before the start of reach” refers to the timing before a predetermined time when the reach state is reached in the change display of the change pattern that reaches the reach state during the change display.

  As described above, the area effect including the first area effect and the second area effect can be executed at a timing selected from a plurality of timings in each of the big hit time and the off time. Thereby, the variation of the production pattern of area production can be enriched. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to at which timing the area effect is executed, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. In addition, for the area effects including the first area effect and the second area effect, since the selection ratio of the timing for executing the effects is different depending on the time of the big hit, the timing of the expectation for the big hit is different at any timing. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the area effect is executed, and to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, although the example which selects and determines an execution timing from two types of execution timing as an execution timing of area | region execution was shown by the area | region effect execution timing determination table of FIG. The execution timing may be selected and determined from the execution timings. In addition, as the execution timing of the area effect, part or all of the selectable execution timings may be different between the first area effect and the second area effect. In addition, the execution timing of the second region effect may be partly or entirely different from the selectable execution timing according to the type of effect to be executed.

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing a first area effect determination table for determining the effect content (effect pattern) when it is determined to execute the first area effect in the area effect execution determination table of FIG. It is. The first area effect determination table includes a first area effect determination table at the time of big hit (A) and a first area effect determination table at the time of losing (B). These first area effect determination tables are stored in the ROM 90102.

  The big hit first area effect determination table (A) is used when it is determined that the variable display result of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the jackpot display result. The first area effect determination table at the time of losing (B) is used when it is determined that the variation display result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the variation display result.

  In each of the first area effect determination tables of (A) and (B), a total of 65 numerical values of the first area effect determination random number SR4 ′ (numerical value range of 0 to 64) are a plurality of types of first area effect determinations. Is assigned to the production contents (production pattern). For SR3 ′, the number of allocated random values is shown for clarity of explanation.

  The first area effect is an effect pattern of the effect content of “special effect only”, which is an effect in which the timer effect is not executed after the special effect that performs “visible / hidden display”, and the special effect that performs “visible / hidden display”. After that, it is roughly divided into effect patterns of effect contents of “special effect + timer effect” which is an effect in which a timer effect is executed. The “special effect only” is a so-called gusset effect (false effect) in which the “timer effect” is not executed by pretending that the “timer effect” is executed by executing the “special effect” that performs “visible / hidden display”. .

  In each first area effect determination table of FIGS. 58A and 58B, a special effect that “displays and hides” the first area 9091 in which the frame color of the timer frame 9097 is displayed in white is set as “special effect only”. An effect pattern that does not execute the timer effect after execution can be selected.

  In each first area effect determination table of FIGS. 58A and 58B, the following first effect pattern to third effect pattern can be selected as “special effect + timer effect”. In the first effect pattern, after executing a special effect that “displays and hides” the first area 9091 in which the frame color of the timer frame 9097 is displayed in white, the frame color of the timer frame 9097 and the timer numerical value of the timer display 9094 are displayed in white. The timer effect displayed at is executed. In the second effect pattern, after executing a special effect that “displays and hides” the first region 9091 in which the frame color of the timer frame 9097 is displayed in white, the frame color of the timer frame 9097 and the timer numerical value of the timer display 9094 are red. The timer effect displayed at is executed. In the third effect pattern, after executing a special effect that shows and hides the first area 9091 in which the frame color of the timer frame 9097 is displayed in red, the frame color of the timer frame 9097 and the timer numerical value color of the timer display 9094 are displayed in red. The timer effect is performed.

  In each first area effect determination table of FIGS. 58A and 58B, there are one type of “special effect only” and three types of “special effect + timer effect” as described above. A total of 65 numerical values of SR4 ′ are allocated so that one effect pattern can be selected and determined from the patterns.

  In the big hit first area effect determination table of (A), “special effect only in white timer frame <special effect in white timer frame + white timer frame and white timer” is determined by the value of SR4 ′ extracted at a predetermined timing. Timer effect with numerical value <Special effect with white timer frame + Timer effect with red timer frame and red timer value <Special effect with red timer frame + Timer effect with red timer frame and red timer value) Data is set to be the selection ratio.

  In the first region effect determination table at the time of losing of (B), “special effect only in white timer frame> special effect in white timer frame + white timer frame and white timer is determined by the value of SR4 ′ extracted at a predetermined timing. Timer effect with numerical value> Special effect with white timer frame + Timer effect with red timer frame and red timer value> Special effect with red timer frame + Timer effect with red timer frame and red timer value ” Data is set to be the selection ratio.

  As described above, as the timer frame 9097 to be displayed and hidden at the time of the special effect, one of a plurality of types of special effects including the special effect for displaying the white timer frame 9097 and the special effect for displaying the red timer frame 9097 is selected. By being executable, it can be noted which type of special effect is executed.

  In each area effect determination table of (A) and (B), data is set as follows. At the time of big hit, compared with the time of losing, the data that “Special effect only” is selected and executed is low, and the data that is executed when either “Special effect + Timer effect” is selected is high. Is set.

  As described above, the selection ratio of the timer effect in the first region effect differs between the time of loss and the time of big hit. As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the selection ratio of the execution timing of the first area effect is different at the time of loss and the time of big hit, and the selection ratio of the timer effect at the first area effect is different at the time of loss and big hit. Therefore, it can be made to pay more attention at which timing special effects are executed.

  Further, the data is set so that the ratio of executing the “timer effect” with the red timer frame and the red timer value selected and executed as a “timer effect” is higher at the time of big hit than at the time of loss. In addition, the data is set so that the ratio of executing and executing the “special effect” in the red timer frame is higher as the “special effect” at the time of big hit than at the time of loss.

  As described above, regarding the first area effect, the ratio of executing the “special effect” in the red timer frame is higher at the time of the big hit than at the time of the loss. Thereby, when the “special effect” in the red timer frame is executed, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the big hit, and to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, at the time of big hit, the ratio that “timer presentation” with the red timer frame and the red timer value is selected and executed is higher than that at the time of loss. Thereby, when the “timer effect” with the red timer frame and the red timer value is executed, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the big hit and to improve the interest of the game.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 58, a special effect of displaying and hiding the white timer frame is executed by executing the white timer frame and hiding display before executing the red timer numerical value display. Even so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting a big hit gaming state.

  In the first area effect determination table, an effect pattern of “special effect only” in the red timer frame may be selected for each of the big hit time and the off time. In the first area effect determination table, the special effect in the red timer frame + the white timer frame and the timer effect in the white timer value are indicated as “special effect + timer effect” for each of the big hit time and the off time. You may make it selectable. In the first area effect determination table, for each of the big hit time and the off time, a timer effect with a white timer frame and a red timer value, and a red timer frame and a white timer value as a “timer effect”. A timer effect in which the color of the timer frame is different from the color of the timer value, such as a timer effect, may be selectable. In that case, when the big hit, the selection ratio of the timer effect when the timer frame color and the timer value color are both red is less than the timer frame color, the timer frame color or the timer value color is less You may make it become higher than the selection ratio of the timer effect in white and the other in red.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a second area effect determination table. The second area effect determination table is a data table used for a lottery for selecting and determining the effect contents of the second area effect when it is determined to execute the second area effect. The second area effect determination table includes the big hit time second area effect determination table of FIG. 59A and the lost second area effect determination table of FIG. 59B. These second area effect determination tables are stored in the ROM 90102 provided on the effect control board 9080.

  When it is determined to execute the second area effect, the effect content executed in the second area 9092 is determined. The effect content executed in the second area 9092 is an effect content indicating which of the timer effect suggestion display and a plurality of types of specific displays other than the timer effect suggestion display is to be displayed in the second region 9092. It is. In the second region 9092, an effect is performed in which one predetermined display is determined among the displays that are rotated and displayed in order from a plurality of types of predetermined displays. The predetermined display includes a timer effect suggestion display and other specific display. When the timer effect suggestion display is performed in the second area 9092, the character “READY” is displayed from the plurality of types of display in the second area 9092, and then the character is switched to “GO” after a predetermined time has elapsed. A second region effect is thus executed. Furthermore, as the second region effect, a timer effect is displayed in which a timer display is displayed after the characters “GO”.

  Apart from such timer display (timer effect suggestion table display), a specific display may be displayed in the second area. The specific display is a display that suggests that the display result of the variable display is expected to be a big hit or that a predetermined reach effect is entered. In the present embodiment, the contents of effects executed in the second area will be described with reference to the table of FIG.

  In FIG. 59, the display of “?” Is a display showing a pattern of a gaze effect that does not execute any effect while pretending to have some effect. The display of “?” Is a display pattern indicating that the currently displayed variation display has the lowest expected degree of jackpot, and the player can hardly expect the variation display being performed. In FIG. 59, “Masaka?” Is a display pattern in which some kind of effect is expected to be executed. Here, a certain effect is an effect in which a predetermined character appears or a character or the like indicating a big hit expectation is displayed. “Masaka?” Is a display pattern indicating that the expected big hit of the variable display currently being executed is low, but the expected big hit is slightly higher than the “?” Display.

  In FIG. 59, the display of “NEXT” is a pseudo-link suggestion display indicating that a pseudo-run is executed after the display is executed. The pseudo-continuous is a pseudo-continuous variation that is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of variations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed although it is originally a variation corresponding to one reserved memory. Is an abbreviation for In FIG. 59, the “battle” display is a battle reach suggestion display that suggests that a battle effect is executed after reach. The battle reach is a reach effect in which an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight is executed. If the ally character wins against the enemy character, it will be a big hit, and if the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, it will be lost.

  In FIG. 59, the display of “zone” is a zone entry suggestion display indicating that the zone effect is entered after the display is executed. The zone effect is an effect indicating that the current variation display is in a state advantageous to the player (a state in which the player is in a zone advantageous to the player). Specifically, the current variation display shows a high degree of expectation of big hit by flowing a telop of characters “Zone rush” around the screen of the effect display device 909. In the zone production, the background, production, and the like are unique to the zone production together with the characters “zone entry”.

  In FIG. 59, the display of “READY GO” suggests that after the character “READY” is displayed for a predetermined time as described above, the character is switched to the character “GO” and then the timer display is started. This is a timer effect suggestion display. In FIG. 59, the display of “extreme heat” is a display pattern indicating that the big hit expectation degree of the currently executed variable display is high. After “Intense heat” is displayed, an effect with a high expectation degree of big hit is executed. The “congratulations” display is a display for confirming that the currently executed variable display is the jackpot display result. Such a display is the most pleasant display for the player.

  In the big hit time second region effect determination table of FIG. 59 (A), the selection ratio of display is “Intense fever> READY GO> Zone> Battle> NEXT> Masaka? = Congratulations, depending on the value of SR5 ′ extracted at a predetermined timing. The data used for selecting the display type to be stopped and displayed in the second region effect is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of “>?”. Further, in the second region effect determination table at the time of losing in FIG. 59 (B), the display selection ratio is “Intense heat <? <READY GO <Zone <Battle <NEXT <> according to the value of SR5 ′ extracted at a predetermined timing. Data used for selecting a display type to be stopped and displayed in the second region effect is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of “No way?”.

  59A and 59B, the display excluding “?” And “Congratulations”, when the display result of the variable display becomes the big hit display result, compared to the case where the display result is an outlier display result. The display type to be stopped and displayed in the second area effect is selected so that the display selection ratio is a magnitude relationship of “Intense heat> READY GO> Zone> Battle> NEXT> No way?”. Therefore, the big hit expectation degree is high according to the order of the magnitude relationship of the selection ratio. In addition, the display of “congratulations” is not selected at the time of losing, but is selected at the time of a big hit. Therefore, although the rate of selecting “congratulations” is low, when “congratulations” is selected, it is determined that the display result of the variable display is a big hit. In addition, regarding the display of “?”, The ratio of selection in the case of a loss is set higher than in the case of a big hit. However, in the case of “?”, The selection ratio is not set so high as compared to the other displays, both in the case of the big hit and in the case of the loss. This is because, in the first place, the area effect is an effect that is executed based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach with a high expectation level of the big hit, so that the gaze effect is not often executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 (e), 55 (f), and 59, the second area effect is executed, so that the timer effect suggestion display such as “READY GO” is displayed and the timer effect is executed. A display that suggests that the effect is to be executed and a display that suggests that an effect other than the timer effect such as “?” Is executed are selected and can be executed. It can be noticed whether a display suggesting an effect other than the timer effect is made, and the interest of the game can be improved in the process before the timer effect is executed.

  In addition, as a display pattern in the second area 9092, a timer display pattern that displays a timer effect suggestion display such as “READY GO” display shown in FIG. 59 and a “?” Display shown in FIG. By providing a display pattern of a specific display that performs a specific display, it is possible to focus on whether a timer effect is displayed or a specific display is displayed, and the process before the timer effect is executed can be further enhanced in the game. Can be improved.

  In addition, as a specific display, an expectation suggestion display that suggests the degree of expectation that is controlled by the big hit gaming state, such as “No way? (Expected) low”, “Intense fever (high expectation)” in FIG. , It can be noted whether the timer display is displayed or the specific display is displayed, and when the specific display is displayed, the display mode of the specific display can also be noted.

  Further, as the specific display, a re-variation suggestion display that suggests that a pseudo-continuous display such as “NEXT (pseudo-continuous suggestion)” in FIG. 59 is included, so that the timer display is displayed. It can be noted whether or not the specific display is displayed, and when the specific display is displayed, the display mode of the specific display can be further focused.

  In addition, the specific indication includes a reach suggestion display that suggests a type of reach effect such as “battle (battle reach suggestion)” in FIG. It is possible to pay attention to whether it is displayed, and when the specific display is displayed, it is possible to pay more attention to the display mode of the specific display.

  Next, processing for setting various effects including an area effect will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process (S90616). In FIG. 60, the process regarding the setting of area | region effect is shown among the various settings contained in the effect setting process in an effect design change start process. In the effect setting process, the effect control CPU 90101 determines various effects to be executed in the area effect by performing the following process.

  First, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variation display executed this time is a super reach variation pattern based on the variation pattern command received during the current variation (S90901). The received variation pattern command is stored in a command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 90103. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the storage area of the RAM 90103 and determines whether or not it is a super reach fluctuation pattern depending on whether or not a super reach fluctuation pattern command is stored in an area showing the fluctuation display executed this time. judge. If it is not a super reach variation pattern, the process proceeds to S90909. If it is a super reach variation pattern, the value of SR2 ′ is extracted, and depending on whether or not the display result of the present variation display is a big hit (disappears), either one shown in FIGS. 56 (A) and (B). The area effect execution determination table is selected, and using the selected table, the presence / absence of execution of the area effect in the current variation display and the type of effect to be executed (first area effect, no. A type of two-region effect) is determined (S90902). Whether or not the display result of the current variable display is a big hit is determined by the display result command received when the current variable display is executed or not. .

  In S90903, based on the determination result of S90902, it is determined that there is an area effect (only the first area effect is executed, only the second area effect is executed, or both the first and second area effects are executed). It is determined whether or not (S90903). If it is determined in S90903 that the area effect is not executed, the process proceeds to S90909. When it is determined in S90903 that the area effect is to be executed, the value of SR3 ′ is extracted, and depending on whether or not the display result of the current variation display is a big hit (missed), FIG. One of the region effect execution timing determination tables shown in (B) is selected, and the execution timing of the region effect in the current variation display is determined from the extracted SR3 ′ value using the selected table (S90904). Next, it is determined whether or not the contents determined in S90902 are contents for executing the first area effect and the second area effect (S90905).

  In S90905, if it is determined that the content is to execute the first area effect and the second area effect, the value of SR4 ′ is extracted, and depending on whether or not the display result of the current variation display is a big hit (missed), 58A and 58B, any one of the first area effect determination tables is selected, and the selected area is used as the first area effect in the current variation display from the extracted SR4 ′ value. The content of the production (production pattern) is determined (S90906). Next, in S90907, the selection of the timer effect among the second area effects is limited. Specifically, in the table of FIG. 59, a setting is made so that the display of “READY GO”, that is, the display of the timer effect suggestion is not selected. Next, the value of SR5 ′ is extracted, and one of the second area effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B) depending on whether or not the display result of the current variation display is a big hit (missed). And using the selected table, the content (effect pattern) of the effect executed as the second region effect in the current variation display is determined from the extracted SR5 ′ value (S90908). Next, the process proceeds to S90909.

  If it is not the content which performs 1st area | region effect and 2nd area | region effect in S90905, it will be determined whether it is the content which performs 1st area | region effect (S90910). If it is determined in step S90910 that the first area effect is to be executed, the value of SR4 ′ is extracted, and depending on whether or not the display result of the current variable display is a big hit (missed), FIG. , (B) is selected from the first area effect determination table, and using the selected table, the content of the effect executed as the first area effect in the current variation display from the extracted SR4 ′ value ( An effect pattern) is determined (S90911).

  In S90910, if it is not the content to execute the first area effect, it is determined that the content is to execute the second area effect in an erasing method, so the value of SR5 ′ is extracted, and the current variation display 59A or 59B, the second region effect determination table shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B is selected according to whether or not the display result is a big hit, and the extracted SR5 ′ is used using the selected table. The content of the effect (effect pattern) to be executed as the second region effect in the current variation display is determined from the value of (S90912). Next, the process proceeds to S90909.

  In S90909, the contents of other effects based on the contents determined for the first area effect and the second area effect and the contents of effects other than the area effects are determined. Thereafter, the process ends.

  Here, a specific example of other effect contents determined in S90909 will be described with a focus on effects executed in the first area effect and the second area effect. For example, if it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in the first area 9091 after the special effect is executed as the first area effect, the timer display 9094 appears in the timer effect based on the super reach variation pattern at that time. The timer value of the timer display that is displayed as the timing period when the timer is displayed, and various effects related to the timer effect such as the effect mode executed when the timer value reaches 0 seconds (super reach specified by the variation pattern command) The content of the effect stored in the ROM 90102) is determined in accordance with the type. In this embodiment, the timer value when the timer display 9094 appears is fixedly set to 10:00 (seconds), for example, regardless of the type of super reach. Note that the timer value when the timer display 9094 appears may be set differently depending on the type of super reach. Further, in the second area effect, for example, when it is determined to execute the timer effect, the content of the timer effect is determined in the same manner.

  Further, in the second area effect, when it is determined that an effect other than the timer effect is to be executed, various effect contents related to those effects such as an effect mode (determined using the second area effect determination table) The content of the effect stored in the ROM 90102 is determined corresponding to the effect. For example, when the “high heat” effect is selected and determined as the second area effect, a telop “high heat” is displayed at a predetermined display position in the display area of the effect display device 909. In response to the display of “Intense heat”, various effects related to effects performed in the display area other than the second area 9092 are determined.

  Further, as an effect other than the timer effect, for example, when it is decided to execute the timer effect in the second region effect, the timer display 9094 is displayed with the timer effect based on the super reach variation pattern at that time. The timer value of the timer display to be displayed as a time measurement period when it appears and the contents of the effect executed when the timer value reaches 0 seconds (corresponding to the type of super reach specified by the variation pattern command ROM 90102 Production contents) are determined.

  In this way, in the effect setting process, when it is determined to execute various effects such as the area effect including the first area effect and the second area effect, the determined content is stored in the ROM 90102 and the effect pattern is executed. For example, the first area effect and the second area as shown in FIG. 55 based on the data related to the effect pattern set in the effect setting process by the effect symbol changing process (S90802) shown in FIG. An area effect including an effect can be executed.

[Second other embodiment]
In the second other form example, a modified example of the timer effect executed in each of the first area 9091 and the second area 9092 shown in the first other form example will be described. Here, as the timer effect according to the second other form example, the effect executed in the first area 9091 is shown as a representative example, but the timer effect according to the second other form example is similarly applied to the second area 9092. It is feasible.

  The timer effect executed in the second other embodiment is a period in which an effect period such as a waiting time until the specific effect is executed in the timer display format when the variable display based on the hold storage information is executed. When the timer display becomes a predetermined mode by updating the display, it is an effect that executes any one of a plurality of types of effects. In the timer display, the count value is updated from the initial value of the count value set at a predetermined timing, and finally, the timer display value becomes 0 (value indicating 0 seconds). The timer display displayed during the timer effect is displayed on the effect display device 909 over a predetermined period during the variable display.

  In addition, during execution of the timer effect, after the timer display is counted down during the period from the start of the period display by the timer display until the period display becomes 0 which is a predetermined mode, the timer display is counted as a stop mode. There is a case where the value of the timer display is set to 0 after stopping for 2 seconds and passing through the stop mode. In this way, the effect that stops the countdown of the timer display for several seconds is hereinafter referred to as a freeze effect. The freeze effect may be such that the countdown of the timer display does not completely stop for several seconds and the countdown does not advance beyond a predetermined period. For example, if a freeze effect is generated with a timer display of “15:47” in the middle of the countdown, a specific number is identified as “15:46” → “15:47” → “15:46” By going back and forth between these numbers, it may be an effect that the timer display does not advance the countdown beyond a predetermined period. Also, the countdown progresses from “15:47” → “15:46” → “15:45”, but it seems that the time has hardly progressed by making the countdown extremely slower than the actual time measurement. It may be a production.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram for describing a timer effect in the second other embodiment. FIGS. 61A to 61E are diagrams showing display examples of the timer display 9094 in the first region 9091 when the freeze effect is executed during the timer effect. FIGS. 61F to 61I are diagrams showing display examples of the timer display 9094 in the first area 9091 when the freeze effect is not executed during the timer effect. Here, in the timer effect, any one of a plurality of types of times is determined as the number of seconds of the timer effect. In FIGS. 61A to 61E, a time of 30 seconds is selected as a period for executing the timer effect. In FIGS. 61F to 61I, a time of 20 seconds is selected as a period for executing the timer effect. The timer effect of the second other embodiment may be executed in the second area 9092 or in any area in the effect display device 909.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (a), when the timer effect is started, for example, a time measurement period “20:00” indicating 20 seconds is displayed in the first area 9091 as the timer display 9094. The period displayed on the timer display 9094 is displayed up to two digits (one hundredth) in seconds and the value is counted down as time passes. FIG. 61B is a diagram showing a timer display 9094 that is displayed when 10 seconds have elapsed after counting down from 20 seconds. As shown in FIG. 61B, when “10:00” indicating 10 seconds is displayed every 10 seconds, a LOCK display 9095 is displayed above the timer display 9094. The LOCK display 9095 is an effect that the display image acts on the timer display 9094, and the display image indicated by the characters LOCK is added to the timer display 9094. A freeze effect is executed by adding the LOCK display 9095 to the timer display 9094. In this way, by adding the LOCK display 9095 to the timer display 9094, the player can easily recognize that the freeze effect is being executed.

  FIG. 61C is a diagram showing a display mode of the timer display 9094 when 10 seconds have elapsed from the state of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 61B and 61C, when the freeze effect is executed, the display of the timer display 9094 is stopped for 10 seconds while the display of “10:00” is maintained, and the LOCK display is displayed. 9095 is added. After the 10 second freeze period, the timer display 9094 is counted down again as shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61 (e), the timer display 9094 is counted down and displayed as “00:00” indicating 0 seconds which is a predetermined mode. Then, based on the fact that the timer display has reached 0 seconds, any one of the effects is executed from among a plurality of effects.

  Here, an example is shown about the effect performed when the timer display 9094 becomes 0 second. The effects executed when the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds include, for example, an effect that the temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-continuous temporarily stops (for example, the symbol described as “NEXT” temporarily stops), and the reach symbol An effect indicating that the game has stopped and reached reach (for example, an accessory operates at the timing of the reach symbol stop), an effect indicating the big hit expectation degree of the fluctuation during the reach effect (for example, Change to a high background). The effect executed when the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds is not limited to the effect shown here, and may be any effect.

  Next, the case where the freeze effect is not executed will be described with reference to FIGS. When a time of 20 seconds is selected as a period for executing the timer effect, as shown in FIG. 61 (f), when the timer effect is started, for example, “20:00” indicating 20 seconds as the timer display 9094. Is displayed in the first area 9091. FIG. 61 (g) is a diagram showing a timer display 9094 displayed when 10 seconds have elapsed after counting down from 20 seconds. As shown in FIG. 61 (g), “10:00” indicating 10 seconds is displayed every 10 seconds. Since the freeze effect is not executed, the LOCK display 9095 is not displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (h), when 1 second has elapsed from FIG. 61 (g), the timer display is displayed as “09: 0” indicating 9 seconds, as shown in FIG. 61 (h). . Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61 (i), the timer display 9094 is counted down and displayed as “00:00” indicating 0 seconds which is a predetermined mode. Then, based on the fact that the timer display has reached 0 seconds, any one of the effects is executed from among a plurality of effects. Here, in FIGS. 61 (a) to (i), the timer display 9094 having two digits after the second is actually counted down, but is not disclosed in detail on the drawing. Alternatively, only the number of seconds, such as “10”, “9”... “0”, may be counted down without displaying two digits after the second.

  In this way, the timer display 9094 displayed in the timer effect is a pattern that goes through the freeze effect in the period from when the display is started until it reaches “00:00” indicating 0 seconds, which is a predetermined mode. And a pattern that does not go through freeze production. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the timer display 9094 in the period from the start of the countdown by the timer display 9094 to 0 seconds.

  Further, in the pattern in which the freeze effect is executed in the timer effect, the timer display 9094 is updated again after the freeze effect is executed for 10 seconds, as shown in FIGS. In this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the timer display 9094 during the period until the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds.

  In addition, although the timer selection time for determining the timer seconds (time from the start of the timer display to 0 seconds) that is the number of seconds in which the timer effect is executed is different, as shown in FIG. There is a case where the display mode at the start of the timer display 9094 is the same (both are the same at “20:00”) in the case of not executing and the case of executing the freeze effect. In this way, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect without determining whether or not to pass the freeze effect at the start of the timer display 9094.

[Third other embodiment]
In the third other form example, a modified example of the timer effect executed in each of the first area 9091 and the second area 9092 shown in the first other form example will be described. Here, as the timer effect according to the third other embodiment, the effect executed in the first area 9091 is shown as a representative example, but the timer effect according to the third other embodiment is similarly applied to the second area 9092. It is feasible.

  In the timer effect executed in the third other embodiment, a special pattern timer effect is set in addition to the normal pattern timer effect. The timer effect of the normal pattern is a pattern in which the display value of the timer display is only counted down with the lapse of time during the period from when the timer display is started until the timer display becomes 0 second. On the other hand, in the timer effect of the special pattern, when the timer display 9094 is counted down to 0 seconds, the effect using the operation means such as the stick controller 90122 is executed. The player's operation with the stick controller 90122 is detected by the tilt direction sensor unit 90123. Specifically, when the player performs an operation of pulling the stick controller 90122 when the timer display 9094 is counted down to 0 seconds, the number of seconds of the timer display 9094 that has been 0 seconds increases, and the countdown is again performed. The effect that is executed is performed. Such a special pattern may be executed a plurality of times, and when it finally reaches 0 seconds, a predetermined effect is executed.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining a timer effect in the third other embodiment. 62A is a diagram showing a timing chart in the case of a two-time pattern with a timer selection time of 20 seconds as a special pattern of the timer effect. The two-time pattern indicates an effect pattern in which an effect using the operation means is executed twice during execution of the timer effect. FIGS. 62B to 62I are diagrams showing display examples of the timer display 9094 in the pattern of FIG. First, the timer effect of the special pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 (a) to (i). The special pattern may be provided not only with the twice pattern but also with a one-time pattern or three or more patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), in a two-time pattern with a timer selection time of 20 seconds executed as a timer effect, “04:00” is first displayed on the timer display 9094 (FIG. 62 (b)). From this state, the timer display 9094 counts down for 4 seconds. When the timer display 9094 becomes a value indicated by “00:00” (FIG. 62C), an operation effect for operating the operation means such as the stick controller 90122 is executed. In the stick controller 90122, a period during which the operation is effective (hereinafter also referred to as an operation effective period) is set to 2 seconds. When the player performs an operation of pulling the stick controller 90122 during the operation effective period of 2 seconds, “+04: 00” is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 (FIG. 62 (d)). )). The display of “+04: 00” is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for the remaining operation effective period and a period obtained by adding 1 second (minimum period of timer display) to the time, and “00” is displayed as the timer display 9094. The number of seconds is increased from “0:00”, and the value “04:00” is displayed in the first area 9091 (FIG. 62E).

  If the operation of pulling the stick controller 90122 is not executed within the operation effective period of 2 seconds, “+04: 00” is automatically displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 at the end of the operation effective period. It is displayed (FIG. 62 (d)). The display of “+04: 00” is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for 1 second after the operation valid period ends, and the number of seconds is increased from “00:00” as the timer display 9094. The value “04:00” is displayed in the first area 9091 (FIG. 62E).

  Here, whether or not the stick controller 90122 is operated, the display of “+04: 00” is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for at least one second (FIG. 62D). )). Further, as the timer display 9094, the number of seconds increases from “00:00”, and the value “04:00” is displayed in the first area 9091 (FIG. 62 (e)). At this time, the player can recognize that the number of seconds in the timer display 9094 has increased. The total period of the operation effective period (operation 2 seconds in FIG. 62A) and the timer display period (timer display 1 second in FIG. 62A) of the effect display device 909 indicating the increased number of seconds of the timer display 9094 is 3 Set to seconds.

  Thereafter, the timer display 9094 starts counting down from 4 seconds indicated by “04:00”, and when the timer display 9094 becomes a value indicated by “00:00” (FIG. 62 (f)), An effect of pulling the stick controller 90122 is executed during the operation valid period. When the player performs an operation of pulling the stick controller 90122 within 2 seconds, “+06: 00” is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 (FIG. 62 (g)). The display of “+06: 00” is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for the remaining operation effective period and a period obtained by adding 1 second to the time, and the number of seconds from “00:00” is displayed as the timer display 9094. The value of “06:00:00” is displayed in the first area 9091 (FIG. 62 (h)).

  If the operation of pulling the stick controller 90122 is not executed within the operation effective period of 2 seconds, “+06: 00” is automatically displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 at the end of the operation effective period. Is displayed (FIG. 62 (g)). The display of “+06: 00” is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for 1 second after the operation valid period ends, and the number of seconds is increased from “00:00” as the timer display 9094, A value of “06:00:00” is displayed in the first area 9091 (FIG. 62 (h)).

  When the timer display 9094 starts counting down from 6 seconds and the timer display 9094 reaches the value indicated by “00:00” (FIG. 62 (i)), a predetermined effect is executed. Any effect that is executed when the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds may be used.

  As described above, in the special pattern, when the timer effect is started and the timer display 9094 reaches the value indicated by 0 seconds, the number of seconds in the timer display 9094 is increased, and an effect in which the countdown is executed again is performed. Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to the effect when the value of the timer display 9094 becomes 0 seconds. In addition, such a special pattern timer effect may cause the player to pay attention to the display mode in the period from when the timer display 9094 starts to count down until the timer display 9094 finally reaches 0 seconds. it can.

[Fourth other embodiment]
In the fourth other form example, a modified example of the timer effect executed in each of the first area 9091 and the second area 9092 shown in the first other form example will be described. Here, as a timer effect according to the fourth other embodiment, an example in which the timer effect is applied to each of the first region 9091 and the second region 9092 is one region called a third region 9096 shown in FIG. Will be described as a representative example.

  The timer effect in the fourth other embodiment is executed during reach. Here, as shown in FIG. 45, the fluctuation pattern to reach includes the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and the fluctuation pattern of super reach. When a variation pattern command designating super reach is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560, the effect control CPU 90101 executes the effect of super reach designated based on the transmitted command. In the first to fourth super reaches in FIG. 45, any one of the plurality of types of special reach (hereinafter also simply referred to as SP reach) is executed for each variation pattern.

  In the SP reach, reach is made in any of the effect symbols during the variable display. Thereafter, after reaching the reach state, the system develops into SP reach after a predetermined time has elapsed (after normal reach or after reach production different from normal reach). The SP reach executed in the super reach is a reach with a high expectation that results in a big hit display as compared with a normal reach that does not develop to the SP reach and does not perform a flashy production after the reach. During SP reach, for example, effects such as battle effects are executed on the liquid crystal screen. The battle effect is an effect in which when a teammate character and an enemy character battle each other and the teammate character wins, the jackpot display result is displayed, and when the teammate character loses, the display result is displayed.

  Further, in the fourth other embodiment, a case will be described in which a timer effect is started in the third area 9096 that is the lower central area of the display screen of the effect display device 909. For example, during SP reach, a flashy effect using the entire screen is executed. In such a case, the timer display 9094 displayed in the third area 9096 does not overlap with the display screen of the effect display device 909 so that such an effect is not hindered (for example, the lower left position of the effect display device 909). The display 9094 is moved. In the fourth other embodiment, the timer effect and the SP reach are executed simultaneously. An effect when the timer effect and the SP reach are executed will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram for describing a timer effect in the fourth other embodiment. When the timer effect is executed, a pattern as shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B and a pattern shown in FIGS. 63A and 63C are executed. As shown in FIG. 63 (a), when the reach is displayed with the symbol “4” on the effect display device 909, a timer image is displayed in the third area 9096 at the lower center of the screen. In the timer image, a timer display 9094 displayed as “20:00” is displayed. The timer display 9094 is counted down as time passes.

  The pattern from FIG. 63A to FIG. 63B shows a case where the normal reach is developed to the weak SP reach. The weak SP reach is an SP reach with a low expectation level resulting in a jackpot display result as compared to a strong SP reach described later. The degree of expectation resulting in the jackpot display result is indicated by the number of black stars shown in FIG. 63 (b). The weak SP reach that is executed this time is 2 out of 5 so that the expectation is not so high. During the weak SP reach, the effect symbol is displayed in a reduced (reduced) command symbol in the upper right area of the effect display device 909. Further, the timer image moves from the position at the lower center of the screen to the position at the lower left end (position corresponding to the first area 9091) when the weak SP reach is started.

  When SP reach is executed, the frame portion 9096a of the timer image may change. However, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), in the weak SP reach, the frame portion 9096a is displayed in the same manner as FIG. 63 (a) before the development to the SP reach. In addition, the timer display 9094 is counted down and indicated by “15:00”. During SP reach, a flashy effect using the entire display screen is executed as compared to the case shown in FIG. 63 (a) before SP reach development. When a flashy effect such as an SP reach effect is executed, if the timer image is displayed in the third area 9096 at the lower center of the screen, the effect is hindered. Therefore, when SP reach is executed during the period from when the timer display 9094 is started until the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds, the timer display 9094 corresponds to the position of the left end of the screen (corresponding to the first area 9091). Position). When SP reach is not executed, the timer image does not change at the position of the lower center of the screen and the timer display 9094 is counted down.

  As described above, the position of the timer display 9094 is changed depending on whether or not the SP reach is performed during the period from when the display of the timer display 9094 is started until the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to consider the state of the effect of whether or not an effect such as SP reach is being executed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  FIG. 63 (c) shows a case where the reach state of FIG. 63 (a) is developed to the strong SP reach. The strong SP reach has a higher expectation level as a jackpot display result than the weak SP reach. As shown in FIG. 63 (c), the strong SP reach that is executed this time is an effect with a high jackpot expectation because the expectation is 4 out of 5 levels. During the strong SP reach, the effect symbol is displayed as a command symbol in a downsized (reduced) form in the upper right area of the effect display device 909. Further, the timer image moves from the third area 9096 at the lower center of the screen to the position at the lower left end (the position corresponding to the first area 9091) when the strong SP reach is started.

  When the strong SP reach is executed, the mode of the frame portion 9096b of the timer image changes. For example, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the color of the frame 9096b changes from white to red (shaded portion in FIG. 63 (c)). In addition, the timer display 9094 is counted down and indicated by “15:00”. Even in the strong SP reach, when the SP reach is executed during the period from the start of the timer display 9094 until the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds as in the case of the weak SP reach, the timer display 9094 is displayed at the left end of the screen. It is moved to a position (a position corresponding to the first region 9091).

  As described above, the position of the timer display 9094 is changed depending on whether or not the SP reach is performed during the period from when the display of the timer display 9094 is started until the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to consider the state of the effect of whether or not an effect such as SP reach is being executed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, the SP reach is a reach with a high degree of expectation for jackpots compared to a normal reach that ends without developing to the SP reach. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by taking into account the execution of such a highly anticipated reach that is a big hit. In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, in a normal state (a state where only reach is applied) before developing to SP reach, a timer display 9094 is displayed in the third area 9096 at the center lower part of the effect display device 909, During the execution of SP reach, the timer display 9094 is displayed at the position on the lower left end of the effect display device 909 (the position corresponding to the first area 9091). Therefore, by preventing the timer display 9094 from inhibiting the effect during the SP reach, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  As shown in FIG. 63, when the weak SP reach is being executed, the frame portion 9096a of the timer image is not changed to white, and when the strong SP reach is being executed, the frame portion 9096b of the timer image is red. Change and display. If it does in this way, the display degree of the frame of the timer display 9094 according to the SP reach to be executed will show the degree of expectation for the big hit, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  When the timer effect of the fourth other embodiment is being executed, the second region effect as shown in the first other embodiment is executed at the position corresponding to the second region 9092. You may make it do.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As shown in FIG. 55, after the special effect of FIG. 55 (b) is executed, the timer effect is executed as shown in FIG. 55 (d), and as shown in FIG. 55 (c). By not being executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the timer effect will be executed before executing the timer effect. Interest can be improved.

  (2) As shown in FIG. 55 (b), in the first area 9091, the timer frame 9097 is displayed so that the timer display 9094 is executed by hiding and displaying the timer frame 9097, thereby executing the timer effect. Can be noticed whether or not is executed, and the interest of the game can be further improved in the process before the timer effect is executed.

  (3) As shown in FIG. 57, for the first region effect, the region effect can be executed at any timing because the special effect can be executed at a plurality of timings such as at the start of change or before the start of reach. It is possible to draw attention to the player, and to enhance the interest of the game.

  (4) As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the selection ratio of the execution timing of the first area effect is different between the time of loss and the time of big hit, and the selection of the timer effect in the first area effect is different between the time of loss and the time of big hit. Since the ratios are different, it is possible to pay more attention to which timing the special effect is executed.

  (5) As shown in FIG. 58, as a timer frame 9097 to be displayed and hidden during a special effect, a plurality of types of special effects including a special effect that displays a white timer frame 9097 and a special effect that displays a red timer frame 9097. It can be made to pay attention to which kind of special effect is performed by being able to perform any of these.

  (6) As shown in FIG. 58, the white timer frame display hidden display can be executed even before the red timer numerical value display is executed, thereby performing a special effect that displays the white timer frame display hidden. Even if it is done, it can prevent the player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state from being lowered.

  (7) As shown in FIGS. 55 (e), 55 (f), and 59, the super reach effect is executed after the timer effect such as “READY GO” is executed by executing the second area effect. The timer effect suggestion display that suggests the fact and the specific display suggesting that an effect other than the timer effect such as “?” Is executed can be selected and executed. It is possible to pay attention to whether the display is made, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the process before the timer effect is executed.

  (8) As a display pattern in the second area 9092, a timer display pattern in which a timer effect suggestion display such as the “READY GO” display shown in FIG. 59 is performed and the timer is displayed, a “?” Display shown in FIG. The display pattern of the specific display for performing the specific display can be made to pay attention to whether the timer effect is displayed or the specific display is displayed, and the process before the timer effect is executed is further enhanced. Can be improved.

  (9) As shown in FIG. 57, for the second region effect, the region effect can be executed at any timing because the special effect can be executed at a plurality of timings such as at the start of fluctuation or before the start of reach. It is possible to draw attention to the player, and to enhance the interest of the game.

  (10) Expectation suggestion indicating the degree of expectation controlled by the big hit gaming state, such as the display of “No way? (Expected) low”, “Intense fever (high expectation)” in FIG. By including the display, it can be noted whether the timer display is displayed or the specific display is displayed, and when the specific display is displayed, the display mode of the specific display can also be focused.

  (11) Whether the timer display is displayed by including a re-variation suggestion display that suggests that a pseudo-continuous display such as “NEXT (pseudo-continuous suggestion)” in FIG. 59 is included as the specific display. Thus, it can be noted whether or not the specific display is displayed, and when the specific display is displayed, the display mode of the specific display can be further focused.

  (12) As the specific display, a reach suggestion display that suggests a type of reach production such as “battle (battle reach suggestion)” in FIG. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not is displayed, and when the specific display is displayed, it is possible to pay more attention to the display mode of the specific display.

  (13) As shown in FIG. 61, the timer display 9094 displayed in the timer effect is counted down from the start of the display until “00:00” indicating 0 seconds which is a predetermined mode. A pattern that passes through the freeze effect and a pattern that does not pass through the freeze effect are provided. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the timer display 9094 in the period from the start of the countdown by the timer display 9094 to 0 seconds.

  (14) As shown in FIG. 62, when the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds, a special pattern in which the time measured value of the timer display 9094 increases can be executed, so that the value of the timer display 9094 becomes 0 seconds. The player can pay attention to the production at the time.

  (15) As shown in FIG. 63, the effect of whether or not an effect such as SP reach is being executed by changing the position of the third region 9096 depending on whether or not SP reach is being executed. The game's interest is improved.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in the area effect execution determination table of FIG. 56, the area effect is executed in the first area 9091, the second area 9092, the first area 9091, and the second area 9092. Explained. However, the area effect may be executed only in one of the areas. In such a case, if it is determined that the area effect is to be executed in one of the areas, the area effect may be limited not to be executed in the other area.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, when the timer effect (gasse effect) is executed in the first area 9091, the execution of the timer effect is limited in the second area 9092. However, the timer effect may be executed simultaneously in both the first area 9091 and the second area 9092. In such a case, the value of the timer display 9094 displayed in the first area 9091 and the value of the timer display 9094 displayed in the second area 9092 may be updated simultaneously. In addition, the numerical value at that time may be the same in one region and the other region, or may be different. Alternatively, the countdown of the numerical value in the other area may be started after the countdown of the numerical value in one area is completed.

  (3) In the embodiment described above, a timer effect may be executed in the first area 9091 and the second area 9092. Then, when the values of the timer display 9094 in the first area 9091 and the second area 9092 simultaneously become values indicating 0 seconds, a predetermined effect may be executed. In such a case, the jackpot value expectation may be set to be higher when the timer effect is executed in both areas than when the timer effect is executed only in one area.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, the time when the change is started or before the start of reach has been described as the timing at which the region effect is executed. However, the timing at which the region effect is executed may be other timing. For example, timing such as predetermined timing during reach establishment or reach, timing at the start of pseudo-variable maximum variation display, start timing of SP reach, timing for executing pre-reading effects, etc. may be executed. . Also, the big hit expectation may be different depending on the execution timing. Moreover, you may make it perform at two or more timings among several timings.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, a timer display may be performed as a pending continuous notice during a big hit game. The holding continuous notice is a so-called holding continuous notice (i.e., one that prefetches the holding memory at the time of the big hit display result and the holding memory in the big hit game and generates a new big hit in the holding memory ( This means that a big hit gaming state is continuously generated). For example, when there is such a holding memory, the timer effect is started at a predetermined timing before the end of the big hit, and the fluctuation display of the holding memory that becomes a big hit is started at the timing when the timer value becomes 0. What should I do?

  (6) In the embodiment described above, a timer effect may be executed during the big hit round. In such a case, for example, the pending continuous notice may be executed at the timing when the timer value becomes 0, the probability change notification indicating that the probability change state is present, or the round continues. A round continuation notification indicating whether or not to perform may be executed.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the effects executed at the time of the special effect and the timer effect are simultaneously determined in the first area effect execution determination table shown in FIG. However, it is also possible to separately determine the effects executed during the special effects and the timer effects. Further, the frame color may be determined when determining the effect executed in the special effect, and the display color of the timer may be determined when determining the effect executed in the timer effect.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, the content of the reserved storage data is determined (read-ahead) before the variable display performed in accordance with the reserved storage is started, and before the variable display is started. In addition, an area effect may be executed as a pre-reading effect for informing the reserved storage data. In such a case, a display such as “Preparing” may be displayed in the area where the area effect is executed to indicate to the player that the area effect is executed.

  (9) In the embodiment described above, the timer effect may be executed a plurality of times when the timer effect is executed. In such a case, you may make it show the frequency | count of execution of the timer effect performed in the future. For example, when “× 2” is displayed, it may be indicated that the timer effect is executed twice. Further, the number of executions of the timer effect may be indicated by displaying a plurality of timer images.

  (10) In the embodiment described above, the timer subtraction time may be set to one pattern by displaying “in preparation” when the timer effect is executed and changing the display period in “in preparation”. Specifically, “preparing” may be displayed during the fluctuation display, and the timer display displayed after that may be displayed as the timer display 9094 for any fluctuation pattern. . In this way, since the actual subtraction time of the timer can be made one pattern, the design of the production becomes easy and the amount of data used for the production can be reduced.

  (11) In the embodiment described above, regarding the effect executed in the second area 9092, the big hit expectation is different between when the period display is executed and when the specific display other than the period display is executed. Also good. For example, when the period display is executed, the degree of jackpot expectation may be higher than when the specific display is executed. When the specific display is executed, the period display is executed. The big hit expectation may be made higher than the case.

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the frame of the second region 9092 is always displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 is shown. However, the frame of the second region 9092 may be displayed only at the timing when the region effect is executed. A special effect may also be executed for the second area 9092.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, the timer display 9094 in which the digital display is counted down with time has been described as the period display displayed in the timer effect. However, the timer display 9094 may be configured such that an effect is executed when a number is counted up with time and a predetermined time is reached. In addition, it is not a numerical display as a period display indicating the passage of time, but a display of an hourglass image indicating the passage of time (a display of time according to the amount of sand remaining in the hourglass) or a gauge image indicating the passage of time. Any effect may be used as long as it is an effect that changes information that can suggest the end timing of a predetermined period with the passage of time, such as an item that is used and displayed (indicating time by increasing or decreasing the gauge). .

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, the configuration of the period display means for indicating the period progress information by updating the period display is provided. Further, there is provided a configuration of predetermined effect execution means that can execute a predetermined effect when the period display updated by the period display means is in a predetermined mode. However, in the configuration of the period display means, the period display may be simply displayed without being updated. Specifically, an image in which the bomb lead wire is lit may be displayed as a display mode indicating the period display. Such an image may be any image as long as the igniting wire itself is not shortened, although it can be seen that the period display is made because the igniting wire of the bomb is on fire. Then, after an image with a fire on a bomb lead as a period display is displayed for a predetermined period, it may explode and some effect may be executed.

  (15) In the embodiment described above, the predetermined effect executed when the timer display becomes 0 may be any effect. For example, as a predetermined effect, a reach symbol is stopped, when a pseudo-continuous effect is stopped, a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped, a jackpot is confirmed (such as a jackpot sound or a premium notice), a predetermined super What develops to reach, or that operates the accessory may be executed. In such a case, at the timing when the timer display becomes 0, any effect selected from a plurality of types of effects may be executed. For example, if a single notification (a jackpot confirmation advance notice) is executed at the timing when the quasi-continuous symbols stop, it is possible to give the player an unexpectedness and improve the interest of the game.

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, when the area effect is executed in both the first area 9091 and the second area 9092, the timer effect is executed in one area, and the value becomes 0. The timer effect may be started in the other area.

  (17) In the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, in the various settings shown in the above-described embodiment, medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set. When a combination of stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the control lever and the symbols on the display means are stopped according to the stop button operation by the player It is also possible to apply the present invention to a slot machine (slot machine) in which medals are paid out to a player. Specifically, the area effect may be executed on a display device such as an effect display device provided in the slot machine.

  (18) In the embodiment described above, the big hit gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a high probability state (probability variation state), a short time state, and a high base state.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, the effect control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 9027R, 9027L, etc.) are mounted. Alternatively, two substrates, the second effect control substrate, may be provided.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. However, the game control microcomputer 90560 is connected to another board (for example, FIG. The sound output lamp 9070 and the lamp driver board 9035 shown in FIG. 42, or a sound / lamp board having a function by a circuit mounted on the sound output board 9070 and a function by a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 9035). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100 on the effect control board 9080 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 909. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs the display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 90560 in the above embodiment, as well as the audio output board 9070, the lamp driver. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the substrate 9035 or the sound / lamp substrate. In the case of such a configuration, the various determinations performed by the production control microcomputer 90100 in the above-described embodiment may be similarly performed by the production control microcomputer 90100, or the sound output may be performed. Control means such as a microcomputer mounted on the board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, or the sound / lamp board may be used.

  (21) In the embodiment described above, in order to notify the microcomputer for effect control of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, etc. Although an example of transmitting the variation pattern command has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notification by two commands, the game control microcomputer uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slide effect, etc. before reaching (so-called second if not reaching) A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode is transmitted before the stop, and the second command is the so-called second stop after reaching the reach such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of the redrawing effect (if the reach is not reach) A command indicating the variation time and variation mode of (after) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. In the game control microcomputer, the change time is notified by each of the two commands, and a specific change mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control microcomputer. Also good. When two commands are sent, the two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is transmitted, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced. In the configuration in which the change pattern is notified to the effect control microcomputer by two commands in this way, the determination result of the display result by the effect process at the time of winning in the second command after transmitting the first command, Alternatively, the prefetch determination information such as the variation pattern type may be transmitted, and the prefetch notice effect may be executed based on the reception of the second command. Here, the pseudo-ream is a pseudo display that is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed although it is a single fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for continuous variation. Further, the slip refers to an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol is stopped in the variable display.

  (22) The embodiment described above can also be applied to an apparatus such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer apparatus or the like by a detachable recording medium, but a storage apparatus that the computer apparatus or the like has in advance. You may take the form that is distributed by pre-installing. Furthermore, the program and data may be distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. The game embodiment is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (23) As this embodiment, a gaming machine that pays out game media to the player's hand in response to the occurrence of a win has been described, but the game media is enclosed and the game media is You may employ | adopt the enclosure type game machine which adds a game point (score), without paying out at hand. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls, which are examples of game media, in the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball launching operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of the winning.

  (24) In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of special symbols and effect symbols of “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variation display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  (25) In the above-described embodiment, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” has been described using a specific value exceeding 0% as a specific example. However, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” may be 0%. For example, when the occurrence ratio of a predetermined game state 1 in a predetermined game period is compared with the occurrence ratio of another game state 2, and “one occurrence ratio is higher than the other occurrence ratio” This includes the case where the percentage of occurrence of one game state is 0%.

  (26) In the above-described embodiment, after the variation display result when the display result of the variation display is determined to be the probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, after the jackpot gaming state is finished, the probability display state is unconditionally changed. An example of controlled probability state control is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation determination device that is controlled to the probability variation state when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the special winning opening in the special variable prize ball device 9020. Type probabilistic state control may be performed.

  (27) It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed herein is illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 5 ... Image display apparatus 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 8L, 8R ... Speaker 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 100 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Production control CPU
123 ... Display control unit VL ... Volume state display image 901 ... Pachinko machine 909 ... Production display device 9091 ... First area 9092 ... Second area 90100 ... Production control microcomputer 90560 ... Game control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A period display means for displaying a period display;
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect when the period display becomes a predetermined mode;
Specific display means capable of displaying a specific display other than the period display in the display area of the period display;
Music playback means capable of playing back music during a specific period,
The music played in the specific period can be selected from a plurality of types of music,
The music playback means plays back a specific part that is a part of the selected music at the time of music selection and is different from the head of the music,
A gaming machine characterized by that.